Mitsubishi Electric FR-F700P Instruction manual

FR-F700P
INVERTER
FR-F700P
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
FR-F720P-0.75K to 110K
FR-F740P-0.75K to 560K
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.
This Instruction Manual (Basic) is intended for users who "just want to run the inverter".
INVERTER
1
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................1
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING ......................................................................3
3
DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM> .............................................................40
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR ................................................................................45
5
ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................70
6
TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................................................115
7
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION......................140
8
SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................149
700P
1
2
3
4
5
For the customers intending to use IPM motors ......... 40
This inverter is set for a general-purpose motor in the initial settings.
For use with an IPM motor, refer to page 40.
IB(NA)-0600411ENG-C(1502)MEE Printed in Japan
MODEL
FR-F700P
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
MODEL
CODE
1A2-P39
Specifications subject to change without notice.
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
C
6
To obtain the Instruction Manual (Applied)
If you are going to utilize functions and performance, refer to the Instruction
Manual (Applied) [IB-0600412ENG].
The Instruction Manual (Applied) is separately available from where you
purchased the inverter or your Mitsubishi sales representative.
The PDF version of this manual is also available for download at "Mitsubishi
Electric FA site," the Mitsubishi Electric FA network service on the world wide
web (URL: http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/fa/)
7
8
This Instruction Manual (Basic) provides handling information and precautions for use of the equipment.
Please forward this Instruction Manual (Basic) to the end user.
WARNING
Incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION
Incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in medium or slight
injury, or may cause only material damage.
CAUTION level may even lead to a serious consequence
The
according to conditions. Both instruction levels must be followed
because these are important to personal safety.
1.Electric Shock Prevention
WARNING
 While the inverter power is ON, do not open the front cover or
the wiring cover. Do not run the inverter with the front cover or
the wiring cover removed. Otherwise you may access the
exposed high voltage terminals or the charging part of the
circuitry and get an electric shock.
 Even if power is OFF, do not remove the front cover except for
wiring or periodic inspection. You may accidentally touch the
charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.
 Before wiring, inspection or switching EMC filter ON/OFF
connector, power must be switched OFF. To confirm that, LED
indication of the operation panel must be checked. (It must be
OFF.) Any person who is involved in wiring, inspection or
switching EMC filter ON/OFF connector shall wait for at least 10
minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF and
check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like.
The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after
power OFF, and it is dangerous.
 This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding)
must conform to the requirements of national and local safety
regulations and electrical code (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class
1 and other applicable standards). A neutral-point earthed
(grounded) power supply for 400V class inverter in compliance
with EN standard must be used.
 Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this
equipment shall be fully competent to do the work.
 The inverter must be installed before wiring. Otherwise you may
get an electric shock or be injured.
 Setting dial and key operations must be performed with dry
hands to prevent an electric shock. Otherwise you may get an
electric shock.
 Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy
loads or pinching. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
 Do not replace the cooling fan while power is ON. It is
dangerous to replace the cooling fan while power is ON.
 Do not touch the printed circuit board or handle the cables with
wet hands. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
 When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main
circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC voltage is applied to
the motor for 1s at powering OFF. Never touch the motor terminal,
etc. right after powering OFF to prevent an electric shock.
 IPM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance
magnets embedded in the rotor. Motor terminals hold highvoltage while the motor is running even after the inverter power
is turned OFF. Before wiring or inspection, the motor must be
confirmed to be stopped. When the motor is driven by the load in
applications such as fan and blower, a low-voltage manual
contactor must be connected at the inverter's output side, and
wiring and inspection must be performed while the contactor is
open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
2. Fire Prevention
CAUTION
 Inverter must be installed on a nonflammable wall without holes
(so that nobody touches the inverter heatsink on the rear side,
etc.). Mounting it to or near flammable material can cause a fire.
 If the inverter has become faulty, the inverter power must be
switched OFF. A continuous flow of large current could cause a
fire.
 Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+ and N/
-. Doing so could cause a fire.
 Daily and periodic inspections must be performed as instructed
in the Instruction Manual. If the product is used without receiving
any inspection, it may cause a burst, break, or fire.
3. Injury Prevention
CAUTION
 The voltage applied to each terminal must be the ones specified in
the Instruction Manual. Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may occur.
 The cables must be connected to the correct terminals.
Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may occur.
 Polarity must be correct. Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may
occur.
 While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not
touch the inverter since the inverter will be extremely hot. Doing
so can cause burns.
4. Additional Instructions
Also the following points must be noted to prevent an accidental failure, injury,
electric shock, etc.
(1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
 The product must be transported in correct method that
corresponds to the weight. Failure to do so may lead to injuries.
 Do not stack the boxes containing inverters higher than the
number recommended.
 The product must be installed to the position where withstands
the weight of the product according to the information in the
Instruction Manual.
 Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or has parts
missing. This can result in breakdowns.
 When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or
setting dial; it may fall off or fail.
 Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product.
 The inverter mounting orientation must be correct.
 Foreign conductive objects must be prevented from entering the
inverter. That includes screws and metal fragments or other
flammable substance such as oil.
 As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it
to impact.
 The inverter must be used under the following environment:
Otherwise the inverter may be damaged.
Environment
This section is specifically about safety matters
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter
until you have read through this Instruction Manual (Basic) and
appended documents carefully and can use the equipment
correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of
the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this
Instruction Manual (Basic), the safety instruction levels are
classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Surrounding air
temperature
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature
Atmosphere
Altitude, vibration
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to +65°C *1
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable
gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Maximum 1000m above sea level for
standard operation. 5.9m/s2 *2 or less at 10
to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
*1 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
*2 2.9m/s2 or less for the 185K or higher.
 If halogen-based materials (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine,
etc.) infiltrate into a Mitsubishi product, the product will be
damaged. Halogen-based materials are often included in
fumigant, which is used to sterilize or disinfest wooden packages.
When packaging, prevent residual fumigant components from
being infiltrated into Mitsubishi products, or use an alternative
sterilization or disinfection method (heat disinfection, etc.) for
packaging. Sterilization of disinfection of wooden package should
also be performed before packaging the product.
A-1
(2) Wiring
CAUTION
 Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge
suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side.
These devices on the inverter output side may be overheated or
burn out.
 The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the
motor affects the rotation direction of the motor.
 IPM motor terminals (U, V, W) hold high-voltage while the IPM
motor is running even after the power is turned OFF. Before
wiring, the IPM motor must be confirmed to be stopped.
Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
 Never connect an IPM motor to the commercial power supply.
Applying the commercial power supply to input terminals (U,V,
W) of an IPM motor will burn the IPM motor. The IPM motor must
be connected with the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter.
(3) Test operation and adjustment
CAUTION
 Before starting operation, each parameter must be confirmed
and adjusted. A failure to do so may cause some machines to
make unexpected motions.
(4) Operation
WARNING
 The IPM motor capacity must be same with the inverter capacity.
(The 0.75K inverter can be used with a one-rank lower MM-EF
motor.)
 Do not use multiple IPM motors with one inverter.
 Any person must stay away from the equipment when the retry
function is set as it will restart suddenly after trip.
 Since pressing






key may not stop output depending on the
function setting status, separate circuit and switch that make an
emergency stop (power OFF, mechanical brake operation for
emergency stop, etc.) must be provided.
OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before resetting
the inverter fault. Resetting inverter alarm with the start signal
ON restarts the motor suddenly.
Do not use an IPM motor in an application where a motor is
driven by its load and runs at a speed higher than the maximum
motor speed.
A dedicated IPM motor must be used under IPM motor control.
Do not use a synchronous motor, induction motor, or
synchronous induction motor under IPM motor control.
The inverter must be used for three-phase induction motors or
the dedicated IPM motor.
Connection of any other electrical equipment to the inverter
output may damage the equipment.
Do not modify the equipment.
Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this
manual. Doing so may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.
CAUTION
 The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee
protection of the motor from overheating. It is recommended to
install both an external thermal and PTC thermistor for overheat
protection.
 Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for
frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. Otherwise the life of
the inverter decreases.
 The effect of electromagnetic interference must be reduced by
using a noise filter or by other means. Otherwise nearby
electronic equipment may be affected.
 Appropriate measures must be taken to suppress harmonics.
Otherwise power supply harmonics from the inverter may heat/
damage the power factor correction capacitor and generator.
 When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, the motor must
be an insulation-enhanced motor or measures must be taken to
suppress surge voltage. Surge voltage attributable to the wiring
constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the
insulation of the motor.
 When parameter clear or all parameter clear is performed, the
required parameters must be set again before starting
operations because all parameters return to the initial value.
 The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before
changing its setting, the performances of the motor and machine
must be fully examined.
 Stop status cannot be hold by the inverter's brake function. In
addition to the inverter's brake function, a holding device must
be installed to ensure safety.
 Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long
period, inspection and test operation must be performed.
 Static electricity in your body must be discharged before you
touch the product. Otherwise the product may be damaged.
 Do not connect an IPM motor under the general-purpose motor
control settings (initial settings). Do not use a general-purpose
motor under the IPM motor control settings. Doing so will cause
a failure.
 In the system with an IPM motor, the inverter power must be
turned ON before closing the contacts of the contactor at the
output side.
(5) Emergency stop
CAUTION
 A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided
to prevent hazardous condition to the machine and equipment in
case of inverter failure.
 When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, the wiring must
be checked for fault (short circuit), and internal parts of the
inverter for a damage, etc. The cause of the trip must be
identified and removed before turning ON the power of the
breaker.
 When any protective function is activated, appropriate corrective
action must be taken, and the inverter must be reset before
resuming operation.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
CAUTION
 Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the
control circuit of the inverter. It will cause a failure.
(7) Disposing of the inverter
CAUTION
 The inverter must be treated as industrial waste.
General instructions
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this Instruction Manual
(Basic) show the inverter without a cover or partially open for
explanation. Never operate the inverter in this manner. The cover
must be always reinstalled and the instruction in this Instruction
Manual (Basic) must be followed when operating the inverter.
For more details on a dedicated IPM motor, refer to the Instruction
Manual of the dedicated IPM motor.
A-2
— CONTENTS —
OUTLINE
1.1
1.2
2
Product checking and parts identification .................................................................. 1
Step of operation ........................................................................................................ 2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
1
CONTENTS
1
3
Peripheral devices...................................................................................................... 4
Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover............................................. 6
Installation of the inverter and instructions................................................................. 8
Wiring.......................................................................................................................... 9
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
Terminal connection diagram .................................................................................................... 9
EMC filter................................................................................................................................. 10
Specification of main circuit terminal ....................................................................................... 11
Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring ......... 11
Control circuit terminals ........................................................................................................... 19
Changing the control logic ....................................................................................................... 22
Wiring of control circuit ............................................................................................................ 24
Mounting the operation panel (FR-DU07) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07)
on the enclosure surface ......................................................................................................... 25
2.4.9 RS-485 terminal block ............................................................................................................. 26
2.4.10 Communication operation........................................................................................................ 26
2.5
Connection of stand-alone option units.................................................................... 27
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.6
2.7
2.8
3
Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2) ................................................................................... 27
Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5) ....................................................................... 29
Connection of the brake unit (BU type) ................................................................................... 31
Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) ....................................................... 32
Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) ....................................... 33
Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC) ..................................................... 34
Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL) ............................................ 35
Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC)............................................................... 36
Precautions for use of the inverter ........................................................................... 37
Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter ........................................................ 39
DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM>
3.1
3.2
4
Setting procedure of IPM motor control <IPM>.................................................... 40
Initializing the parameters required to drive an IPM motor (Pr.998) <IPM> ......... 42
DRIVING THE MOTOR
4.1
40
45
Operation panel (FR-DU07) ..................................................................................... 45
4.1.1
4.1.2
Component of the operation panel (FR-DU07)........................................................................ 45
Basic operation (factory setting) .............................................................................................. 46
I
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.2
4.3
4.4
Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)...........................................51
When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3)<V/F><S MFVC>..........................52
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode) .......................................53
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.5
Setting the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz) ...................... 53
Using the setting dial like a potentiometer at the operation ..................................................... 55
Setting the frequency by switches (multi-speed setting for 3 speeds)..................................... 56
Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input).............................................................. 58
Setting the frequency by analog input (current input) .............................................................. 59
Start/stop using terminals (External operation) ........................................................60
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
5
Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)................................................................... 47
Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s)) ...................................................... 48
Monitoring of output current and output voltage ...................................................................... 49
First priority monitor ................................................................................................................. 49
Displaying the set frequency.................................................................................................... 49
Changing the parameter setting value..................................................................................... 50
Setting the frequency by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3) ....................................................... 60
Switching between the automatic operation and the manual operation
(operation by the multi-speed setting and the operation panel) (Pr.79=3) .............................. 62
Setting the frequency by switches (multi-speed setting for 3 speeds) (Pr.4 to Pr.6) ............... 64
Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input).............................................................. 66
Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum voltage
input (5V, initial value) ............................................................................................................ 67
Setting the frequency by analog input (current input) .............................................................. 68
Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum current input
(at 20mA, initial value) ............................................................................................................. 69
ADJUSTMENT
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Simple mode parameter list......................................................................................70
Increasing the starting torque (Pr. 0) <V/F> .............................................................72
Limiting the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2).......................73
Changing acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8) .....................................74
Energy saving operation for fans and pumps (Pr.14, Pr.60) <V/F>.........................75
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.6
5.7
5.8
70
Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) ............................................................................................... 75
Energy saving control (Pr.60) ................................................................................................. 75
Selection of the start command and frequency command sources (Pr. 79)............77
Parameter clear, all parameter clear ....................................................................78
Parameter copy and parameter verification .........................................................79
5.8.1
5.8.2
Parameter copy ....................................................................................................................... 79
Parameter verification.............................................................................................................. 80
5.9 Initial value change list .........................................................................................81
5.10 Parameter list .......................................................................................................82
5.10.1 List of parameters classified by the purpose ........................................................................... 82
5.10.2 Display of the extended parameters ........................................................................................ 85
5.10.3 Parameter list........................................................................................................................... 86
II
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
Reset method of protective function....................................................................... 115
List of fault or alarm display.................................................................................... 116
Causes and corrective actions ............................................................................... 117
Correspondences between digital and actual characters...................................... 130
Check and clear of the faults history .................................................................. 131
Check first when you have a trouble...................................................................... 133
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.6.6
6.6.7
6.6.8
6.6.9
6.6.10
6.6.11
6.6.12
6.6.13
6.6.14
7
Motor does not start............................................................................................................... 133
Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise........................................................... 135
Inverter generates abnormal noise........................................................................................ 135
Motor generates heat abnormally .......................................................................................... 135
Motor rotates in the opposite direction .................................................................................. 136
Speed greatly differs from the setting .................................................................................... 136
Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth ................................................................................ 136
Speed varies during operation............................................................................................... 137
Operation mode is not changed properly .............................................................................. 137
Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating............................................................. 138
Motor current is too large....................................................................................................... 138
Speed does not accelerate .................................................................................................... 139
Unable to write parameter setting.......................................................................................... 139
Power lamp is not lit .............................................................................................................. 139
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
7.1
Daily inspection ..................................................................................................................... 140
Periodic inspection ................................................................................................................ 140
Daily and periodic inspection ................................................................................................. 141
Display of the life of the inverter parts ................................................................................... 142
Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 144
Replacement of parts ............................................................................................................ 144
Inverter replacement.............................................................................................................. 148
SPECIFICATIONS
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.5
8.6
149
Rating ..................................................................................................................... 149
Common specifications .......................................................................................... 151
Outline dimension drawings ................................................................................... 153
8.3.1
8.4
140
Inspection item ....................................................................................................... 140
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
7.1.7
8
115
CONTENTS
6
Inverter outline dimension drawings ...................................................................................... 153
Specification of premium high-efficiency IPM motor
[MM-EFS (1500r/min) series] ................................................................................. 162
Specification of premium high-efficiency IPM motor
[MM-THE4 (1500r/min) series]............................................................................... 163
Specification of high-efficiency IPM motor
[MM-EF (1800r/min) series].................................................................................... 164
III
8.7
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure ............................................................165
8.7.1
8.7.2
When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN).................................................... 165
Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-F740P-185K or higher........................................................ 165
APPENDICES
167
Appendix 1 For customers who are replacing the conventional model
with this inverter ..................................................................................... 167
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-F500 series .......................................................................... 167
Appendix 1-2 Replacement of the FR-A100 <EXCELENT> series ................................................. 168
Appendix 2
Appendix 3
Instructions for compliance with the EU Directives ............................... 169
Instructions for UL and cUL compliance ............................................... 171
<Abbreviations>
DU: Operation panel (FR-DU07)
PU: Operation panel(FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
Inverter: Mitsubishi inverter FR-F700P series
FR-F700P: Mitsubishi inverter FR-F700P series
Pr.: Parameter Number (Number assigned to function)
PU operation: Operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
External operation: Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation: Combined operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and external operation
General-purpose motor: Three-phase induction motor
Standard motor: SF-JR
Constant-torque motor: SF-HRCA
Dedicated IPM motor: High-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF (1800r/min specification)
Premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS (1500r/min specification)
The following marks are used to indicate the controls as below.
(Parameters without any mark are valid for all controls.)
Mark
Control method
V/F
V/F control
S MFVC
Simple magnetic flux
vector control
IPM
IPM motor control
Applied motor (control)
Three-phase induction motor
(general-purpose motor control)
Dedicated IPM motor
(IPM motor control)
<Trademarks>
LONWORKS® is registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.
<Notes on descriptions in this Instruction Manual>
Connection diagrams in this Instruction Manual appear with the control logic of the input terminals as sink logic, unless
otherwise specified. (For the control logic, refer to page 22.)
Harmonic suppression guideline
All models of General-purpose inverters used by specific consumers are covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for
consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage". (
(Applied) .)
IV
For further details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Instruction Manual
Product checking and parts identification
1 OUTLINE
1.1 Product checking and parts identification
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to
ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.
• Inverter Model
FR - F720P - 5.5 K
Symbol Voltage Class
F720P Three-phase 200V class
F740P Three-phase 400V class
Represents inverter
capacity (kW)
Cooling fan
(Refer to page 145)
PU connector
RS-485 terminals
(Refer to page 26)
(Refer to page 25)
Connector for plug-in option connection
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of options.)
Voltage/current input switch
(Refer to page 9)
AU/PTC switchover switch
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
(Refer to page 10)
1
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
OUTLINE
(Refer to page 6)
Power lamp
Lit when the control circuit
(R1/L11, S1/L21) is supplied
with power.
Alarm lamp
Lit when the inverter is
in the alarm status
(fault).
Control circuit
terminal block
(Refer to page 11)
Main circuit terminal block
Front cover
(Refer to page 19)
(Refer to page 6)
Rating plate
Charge lamp
Lit when power is
supplied to the main
circuit (Refer to page 11)
Production year and month
Capacity plate
Combed shaped
wiring cover
Capacity plate
(Refer to page 13)
FR-F720P-5.5K
200V
DATE:XXXX-XX
FR-F720P-5.5K
· DC reactor supplied (75K or higher)
· Eyebolt for hanging the inverter (37K to 315K)
· Fan cover fixing screws (30K or lower)
(Refer to page 169)
400V
Inverter model
Applied motor
capacity
Input rating
Output rating
Serial number
Inverter model Serial number
 Accessory
Rating plate
Capacity
Screw Size (mm)
Quantity
2.2K to 5.5K
7.5K to 15K
18.5K to 30K
3.7K, 5.5K
7.5K to 18.5K
22K, 30K
M3 35
M4 40
M4 50
M3 35
M4 40
M4 50
1
2
1
1
2
1
Capacity
Eyebolt Size
Quantity
37K
45K to 160K
185K to 315K
M8
M10
M12
2
2
2
REMARKS
· For removal and reinstallation of covers, refer to page 6.
 SERIAL number check
Rating plate example


Symbol Year


Month Control number
SERIAL
The SERIAL consists of one symbol, two characters indicating production year and month, and six
characters indicating control number.
The last digit of the production year is indicated as the Year, and the Month is indicated by 1 to 9,
X (October), Y (November), or Z (December.)
1
Step of operation
1.2 Step of operation
The inverter needs frequency command and start command. Frequency command (set frequency) determines the
rotation speed of the motor. Turning ON the start command starts the motor to rotate.
Refer to the flow chart below to perform setting.
Step
Step of
off operation
op
operation
Frequency
: Initial setting
Frequency command
Inverter
output
frequency
(Hz)
Frequency
command
ON
Installation/mounting
{Refer to page 8}
Wiring of the power
supply and motor
{Refer to page 11}
Time
(S)
Start command using the PU connector and
RS-485 terminal of the inverter and plug-in
option (Communication)
How
to give a start
command?
Refer to Chapter 4 of
Connect a switch, relay, etc.
to the control circuit
terminal block of the inverter
to give a start command. (External)
Start command with
on the operation panel (PU)
How to
give a frequency
command?
How to
give a frequency
command?
(PU)
Change frequency
with ON/OFF switches
connected to terminals
(multi-speed setting)
(External)
Perform frequency
setting by a current
output device
(Connection across
terminals 4 and 5)
(External)
{Refer to page 53}
{Refer to page 56}
{Refer to page 59}
Set from the
PU (FR-DU07/
FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
the Instruction Manual (Applied) .
Set from the
PU (FR-DU07/
FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
(PU)
{Refer to page 60}
Perform frequency
setting by a voltage
output device
(Connection across
terminals 2 and 5)
(External)
{Refer to page 58}
Change of frequency
with ON/OFF switches
connected to terminals
(multi-speed setting)
(External)
Perform frequency
setting by a current
output device
(Connection across
terminals 4 and 5)
(External)
{Refer to page 64}
{Refer to page 68}
Perform frequency
setting by a voltage
output device
(Connection across
terminals 2 and 5)
(External)
{Refer to page 66}
CAUTION
Check the following points before powering ON the inverter.
· Check that the inverter is installed correctly in a correct place. (Refer to page 8)
· Check that wiring is correct. (Refer to page 9)
· Check that no load is connected to the motor.
·When protecting the motor from overheat by the inverter, set Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay (Refer to
page 51)
·To drive a general-purpose motor with the rated motor frequency of 50Hz, set Pr.3 Base frequency
(Refer to page 52)
2
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Three-phase AC power supply
Use within the permissible power supply
specifications of the inverter.
Programmable
controller
Human machine interface
Inverter (FR-F700P)
(Refer to page 149)
Moulded case circuit
breaker (MCCB)
or earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELB), fuse
The life of the inverter is influenced by surrounding
air temperature. The surrounding air temperature
should be as low as possible within the permissible
range. Especially when mounting the inverter
inside an enclosure, take cautions of the
surrounding air temperature. (Refer to page 8)
Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the inverter.
The control signal lines must be kept fully away
from the main circuit to protect them from noise.　(Refer to page 9)
Refer to page 10 for the built-in EMC filter.
RS-485 terminal block
The inverter can be connected with a
computer such as a programmable
controller and with GOT (human
machine interface).
They support Mitsubishi inverter
protocol and Modbus-RTU (binary)
protocol.
The breaker must be selected carefully since
an inrush current flows in the inverter at
power on.
(Refer to page 4)
Magnetic contactor(MC)
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure safety.
Do not use this MC to frequently start and stop the
inverter.
Doing so will cause the inverter life to be shortened.
(Refer to page 4)
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL)
Install reactors to suppress harmonics and to
improve the power factor. An AC reactor (FR-HAL)
(option) is required when installing the inverter near
a large power supply system (1000kVA or more).
The inverter may be damaged if you do not use
reactors.
Select the reactor according to the model.
For the 55K or lower, remove the jumpers across
terminals P/+ and P1 to connect to the DC reactor.
(Refer to Chapter 3 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied) .)
EMC filter
(ferrite core)
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
DC reactor
(FR-HEL)
EMC filter
(ferrite core)
(FR-BLF)
The 55K or lower has a built-in
common mode choke.
P/+ P1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P/+ N/-
For the 75K or higher, a
DC reactor is supplied.
Always install the reactor.
IM connection
IPM connection
U V W
U VW
Earth
(Ground)
(Refer to page 35)
(Refer to Chapter 3 of the
Instruction Manual (Applied) .)
(Refer to Chapter 3 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied) .)
Contactor
Example) No-fuse
switch (DSN type)
Brake unit
(FR-BU2)
P/+ PR
P/+
High power factor
converter
(FR-HC2)
Power regeneration
common converter
(FR-CV*1)
Power regeneration
converter (MT-RC*2)
Power supply harmonics
can be greatly suppressed.
Install this as required.
Greater braking capability
is obtained.
Install this as required.
(Refer to page 32)
(Refer to page 33 and 34)
*1 Compatible with the 55K or lower.
*2 Compatible with the 75K or higher.
: Install these options as required.
2
Install an EMC filter (ferrite
core) to reduce the
electromagnetic noise
generated from the inverter.
Effective in the range from
about 0.5MHz to 5MHz.
A wire should be wound four
turns at a maximum.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
AC reactor
(FR-HAL)
Generalpurpose
motor
Earth
(Ground)
PR
Resistor unit
(FR-BR*1, MT-BR5*2)
The regeneration braking
capability of the inverter can be
exhibited fully.
Install this as required.
(Refer to page 27)
Devices connected
to the output
Earth
Do not install a power
factor correction capacitor,
(Ground)
surge suppressor or EMC filter (capacitor) on the
output side of the inverter.
When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on
the output side of the inverter, contact each
manufacturer for selection of the moulded case
circuit breaker.
Install a contactor in an
application where the IPM
motor is driven by the load
even at power-OFF of the
inverter. Do not open or
close the contactor while
the inverter is running
(outputting).
Dedicated IPM motor
(MM-EFS, MM-THE4,
MM-EF)
Use the specified motor.
IPM motors cannot be driven
by the commercial power
supply.
(Refer to page 162 and 164)
Earth (Ground)
To prevent an electric shock, always earth
(ground) the motor and inverter.
CAUTION
· Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side. This will
cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected,
immediately remove them.
· Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication
devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference.
(Refer to Chapter 2 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· Refer to the instruction manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.
· An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
· An IPM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded inside. High-voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the
motor is running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. Before closing the contactor at the output side, make sure that the
inverter power is ON and the motor is stopped.
3
Peripheral devices
2.1 Peripheral devices
Check the inverter model of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to
the capacity. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
200V class
Motor
Output (kW)
*1
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
*1
*2
*3
Applicable Inverter
Model
FR-F720P-0.75K
FR-F720P-1.5K
FR-F720P-2.2K
FR-F720P-3.7K
FR-F720P-5.5K
FR-F720P-7.5K
FR-F720P-11K
FR-F720P-15K
FR-F720P-18.5K
FR-F720P-22K
FR-F720P-30K
FR-F720P-37K
FR-F720P-45K
FR-F720P-55K
FR-F720P-75K
FR-F720P-90K
FR-F720P-110K
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) *2
or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB)
Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
(NF or NV type)
Power factor improving (AC or DC) reactor
Without
With
Without
With
10A
15A
20A
30A
50A
60A
75A
125A
150A
175A
225A
250A
300A
400A



10A
15A
15A
30A
40A
50A
75A
100A
125A
150A
175A
225A
300A
350A
400A
400A
500A
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N25
S-N35
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N95
S-N150
S-N180
S-N220



S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N35
S-N50
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N125
S-N150
S-N180
S-N300
S-N300
S-N400
Assumes the use of a dedicated IPM motor or a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with the power supply voltage of 200VAC 50Hz.
Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
MCCB
INV
Install one MCCB per inverter.
For using commercial-power supply operation, select a breaker with capacity which allows the motor to be
MCCB
INV
directly power supplied.
M
M
For installation in the United States or Canada, select a fuse in accordance with UL, cUL, the National
Electrical Code and any applicable local codes, or use UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB).
(Refer to page 171.)
Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated
current. When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general-purpose motor, select an
MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
CAUTION
 When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model, and select cable and reactor according to the motor output.
 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power ON the breaker.
4
Peripheral devices
400V class
Applicable Inverter
Model
*1
*1
*2
*3
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
150
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
FR-F740P-0.75K
FR-F740P-1.5K
FR-F740P-2.2K
FR-F740P-3.7K
FR-F740P-5.5K
FR-F740P-7.5K
FR-F740P-11K
FR-F740P-15K
FR-F740P-18.5K
FR-F740P-22K
FR-F740P-30K
FR-F740P-37K
FR-F740P-45K
FR-F740P-55K
FR-F740P-75K
FR-F740P-90K
FR-F740P-110K
FR-F740P-132K
FR-F740P-160K
FR-F740P-160K
FR-F740P-185K
FR-F740P-220K
FR-F740P-250K
FR-F740P-280K
FR-F740P-315K
FR-F740P-355K
FR-F740P-400K
450
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) *2
Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB)
(NF or NV type)
Power factor improving (AC or DC) reactor
Without
With
Without
With
5A
10A
10A
20A
30A
30A
50A
60A
75A
100A
125A
150A
175A
200A













5A
10A
10A
15A
20A
30A
40A
50A
60A
75A
100A
125A
150A
175A
225A
225A
225A
400A
400A
400A
400A
500A
600A
600A
700A
800A
900A
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N25
S-N35
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N80













S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N11, S-N12
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N25
S-N50
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N95
S-N150
S-N180
S-N220
S-N300
S-N300
S-N300
S-N400
S-N600
S-N600
S-N600
S-N600
S-N800
FR-F740P-450K

1000A

1000A
Rated product
500
FR-F740P-500K

1200A

1000A
Rated product
560
FR-F740P-560K

1500A

1200A
Rated product
2
Assumes the use of a dedicated IPM motor or a Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with the power supply voltage of 400VAC 50Hz.
Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
MCCB
INV
M
Install one MCCB per inverter.
For using commercial-power supply operation, select a breaker with capacity which allows the motor to be
MCCB
INV
M
directly power supplied.
For installation in the United States or Canada, select a fuse in accordance with UL, cUL, the National
Electrical Code and any applicable local codes, or use UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB). (Refer to
page 171.)
Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated
current. When using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general-purpose motor, select an
MC regarding the rated motor current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
CAUTION
 When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model, and select cable and reactor according to the motor output.
 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power ON the breaker.
5
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Motor
Output
(kW)
Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover
Removal of the operation panel
1) Loosen the two screws on the operation panel.
(These screws cannot be removed.)
2) Push the left and right hooks of the operation panel
and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.
When reinstalling the operation panel, insert it straight to reinstall securely and tighten the fixed screws of the
operation panel. (Tightening torque: 0.40N·m to 0.45N·m)
30K or lower
Removal
1) Loosen the installation screws of the
front cover.
2) Pull the front cover toward you to remove by pushing an
installation hook using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover
Front cover
Installation hook
Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of
the front cover into the sockets of the
inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports,
securely press the front cover
against the inverter.
(Although installation can be done
with the operation panel mounted,
make sure that a connector is
securely fixed.)
Front cover
Front cover
6
3) Tighten the installation
screws and fix the front
cover.
Front cover
Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
37K or higher
Removal
1) Remove installation screws on
the front cover 1 to remove the
front cover 1.
2) Loosen the installation
screws of the front cover 2.
3) Pull the front cover 2 toward you to
remove by pushing an installation
hook on the right side using left
fixed hooks as supports.
Installation hook
Front cover 1
Front cover 2
Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the
front cover 2 into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely
press the front cover 2 against the inverter.
(Although installation can be done with the
operation panel mounted, make sure that a
connector is securely fixed.)
Front cover 2
3) Fix the front cover 2 with the
installation screws.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2
Front cover 2
4) Fix the front cover 1 with the
installation screws.
Front cover 1
Front cover 2
REMARKS
 For the FR-F740P-185K or higher, the front cover 1 is separated into two parts.
CAUTION
 Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.
 The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the
front cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed.
7
Installation of the inverter and instructions
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions
 Installation of the Inverter
Installation on the enclosure
0.75K to 30K
CAUTION
37K or higher
 When encasing multiple inverters, install them in
parallel as a cooling measure.
 Install the inverter vertically.
Vertical
Refer to the cleara
nces below.
Fix six points for the FR-F740P-185K
to 400K and fix eight points for the
FR-F740P-450K to 560K.
 Install the inverter under the following conditions.
Measurement
position
5cm Inverter 5cm
Measurement
position
55K or lower
75K or higher
20cm or more
10cm or more
5cm
or more *
5cm
Clearances (side)
Clearances (front)
Surrounding air temperature and humidity
Temperature: -10°C to 50°C
Humidity: 90% RH maximum
Leave enough clearances as a
cooling measure.
5cm
or more *
10cm
or more
10cm or more
10cm
or more
20cm or more
5cm Inverter
or more
*
*1cm or more for 3.7K or lower
*1cm or more for 3.7K or lower
REMARKS
 For replacing the cooling fan of the FR-F740P-185K or higher, 30cm of space is necessary in front of the inverter.
Refer to page 145 for fan replacement.
 The inverter consists of precision mechanical and electronic parts. Never install or handle it in any of the following
conditions as doing so could cause an operation fault or failure.
Direct sunlight
Vertical mounting
(When installing two or
more inverters, install
them in parallel.)
8
Vibration(5.9m/s2 * or more at 10 to
55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes))
* 2.9m/s2 or more for the 185K or
higher
Transportation by
holding the front cover
High temperature,
high humidity
Oil mist, flammable
gas, corrosive gas,
fluff, dust, etc.
Horizontal placement
Mounting to
combustible material
Wiring
2.4 Wiring
Terminal connection diagram
*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Be sure to connect the DC reactor
supplied with the 75K or higher.
When a DC reactor is connected
to the 55K or lower, remove the
jumper across P1 and P/+.
Sink logic
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Earth
(ground)
Jumper
P1
MC
MCCB
Jumper
*2. To supply power to the
control circuit separately,
remove the jumper across
R1/L11 and S1/L21.
*2
EMC filter
ON/OFF
OFF connector *8
Control circuit
B1
STR
A1
B2
Relay output 2
RUN
RT
SU
MRS
IPF
Output stop
RES *3
Reset
OL
AU
24VDC power supply
(Common for external power supply transistor)
PC
CS PTC
SD
Frequency setting signal (Analog)
3
2
1
Auxiliary (+)
input (-)
Terminal
4 input (+)
(-)
(Current
input)
Connector
Open collector output
2
Running
Terminal functions
vary with the output
Up to frequency terminal assignment
(Pr. 190 to Pr. 194)
Instantaneous (Refer to Chapter 4 of
power failure the Instruction Manual
Overload
(Applied))
FU
Frequency detection
SE
SINK
AU
*5. It is recommended to use
2W1k when the
frequency setting signal is
changed frequently.
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual
(Applied))
C2
JOG
Terminal 4 input selection
(Current input selection)
Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure
Contact input common
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual
(Applied))
Relay output
Terminal functions
vary with the output
Relay output 1 terminal assignment
(Fault output) (Pr. 195, Pr. 196)
RL
Second function selection
*4. Terminal input specifications
can be changed by analog
input specifications switchover
(Pr. 73, Pr. 267). Set the
voltage/current input switch in
the OFF position to select
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to
10V) and ON to select current
input (0 to 20mA).
M
A2
Jog operation
Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1k
*5
Motor
STOP
RM
Low speed
*3. AU terminal can be
used as PTC input
terminal.
*7. Do not use PR and PX terminals.
Please do not remove the jumper
connected to terminal PR and PX.
C1
STF
RH
Middle speed
*6. A CN8 (for MT-BU5)
connector is provided
with the 75K or higher.
Earth
(ground)
cable
*8. The 200V class 0.75K and 1.5K
are not provided with the ON/OFF
connector EMC filter.
Main circuit
SOURCE
Multi-speed
selection
N/- CN8*6
U
V
W
ON
Start self-holding selection
High speed
PX*7
Inrush current
limit circuit
R1/L11
S1/L21
Earth
(Ground)
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Forward
Terminal functions vary
rotation
with the input terminal
start
assignment
Reverse
(Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)
rotation
(Refer to Chapter 4 of the
start
Instruction Manual (Applied))
Jumper
P/+ PR*7
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Three-phase AC
power supply
Resistor unit
(Option)
Brake unit
(Option)
*1
24V
PU
*4 Voltage/current connector
input switch
4 2
10E(+10V)
ON
FM
10(+5V)
OFF
0 to 5VDC Initial value
SD
2 0 to 10VDC
selectable *4
0 to 20mADC
5
AM
(Analog common)
Initial
0 to ±10VDC value
1
0 to ±5VDC selectable *4
Initial
4 to 20mADC value
4 0 to 5VDC
selectable *4
0 to 10VDC
5
Indicator
- (Frequency
meter, etc.)
+
Calibration
resistor *9
(+)
(-)
Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale
Analog signal output
(0 to 10VDC)
RS-485 terminals
TXD-
Data transmission
RXD+
SG
Option connector 1
*9. It is not necessary
when calibrating the
indicator from the
operation panel.
TXD+
RXD-
for plug-in option
connection
Open collector output common
Sink/source common
Terminating
resistor VCC
Data reception
GND
5V (Permissible load
current 100mA)
CAUTION
· To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm away from the power cables. Also separate the
main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
· After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc. take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
· Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Operation with a wrong setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
9
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.4.1
Wiring
2.4.2
EMC filter
This inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter (capacitive filter) and common mode choke.
The EMC filter is effective for reduction of air-propagated noise on the input side of the inverter.
The EMC filter is factory-set to disable (OFF). To enable it, fit the EMC filter ON/OFF connector to the ON position.
The input side common mode choke, built-in the 55K or lower inverter, is always valid regardless of ON/OFF of the
EMC filter ON/OFF connector.
5.5K or lower
EMC filter OFF
(initial setting)
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740P-0.75K to 5.5K
15K or higher
7.5K, 11K
EMC filter ON
EMC filter OFF
(initial setting)
FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K
FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K
EMC filter ON
FR-F720P-15K
FR-F740P-15K, 18.5K
FR-F720P-18.5K to 30K
FR-F740P-22K, 30K
EMC filter OFF
(initial setting)
EMC filter ON
FR-F720P-37K or higher
FR-F740P-37K or higher
EMC filter
ON/OFF
connector
U
V
W
The FR-F720P-0.75K and 1.5K are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (Always ON)
<How to disconnect the connector>
(1) Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is OFF, wait
for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and check that there are no residual voltage
using a tester or the like. (For the front cover removal method, refer to page 6.)
(2) When disconnecting the connector, push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or
forcibly pulling the connector with the tab fixed. When installing the connector, also engage the fixing tab securely.
If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, use a pair of long-nose pliers, etc.
EMC filter
ON/OFF connector
(Side view)
Disengage connector fixing tab.
With tab disengaged,
pull up connector straight.
CAUTION
 Fit the connector to either ON or OFF.
 Enabling (turning ON) the EMC filter increases leakage current. (Refer to Chapter 3 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied))
WARNING
While power is ON or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
10
Wiring
Specification of main circuit terminal
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Name
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
AC power input
U, V, W
Inverter output
R1/L11,
S1/L21
Power supply for
control circuit
Connect to the commercial power supply.
Keep these terminals open when using the high power
factor converter (FR-HC2) or power regeneration
common converter (FR-CV).
Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor or dedicated
IPM motor.
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/
L2. To retain the fault display and fault output or when
using the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or power
regeneration common converter (FR-CV), remove the
jumpers from terminals R/L1 and R1/L11, and S/L2 and
S1/L21, and apply external power to these terminals.
The power capacity necessary when separate power is
supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the
inverter capacity.
200V class
400V class
P/+, N/-
P/+, P1
PR, PX
2.4.4
Refer to
Page
Description
15K or lower
60VA
60VA
18.5K
80VA
60VA
11
11
17
22K or higher
80VA
80VA
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU and MTBU5), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV),
high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or power
regeneration converter (MT-RC).
For the 55K or lower, remove the jumper across terminals
P/+ and P1, and connect the DC reactor (FR-HEL). (Be
sure to connect the DC reactor supplied with the 75K or
DC reactor
higher.)
connection
When a DC reactor is not connected, the jumper across
terminals P/+ and P1 should not be removed.
Please do not remove or use terminals PR and PX or the jumper connected.
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be
Earth (ground)
earthed (grounded).
Brake unit
connection
27
2
35
—
16
Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor
wiring
FR-F720P-0.75K, 1.5K
Jumper
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740P-0.75K to 5.5K
Jumper
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
PR
Jumper
R1/L11 S1/L21 N/-
P/+
PX
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
P/+
PR
PX
R1/L11 S1/L21
M
Power supply Motor
Charge lamp
M
Power
supply
Charge lamp
Motor
11
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2.4.3
Wiring
FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K
FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K
FR-F720P-15K
FR-F740P-15K, 18.5K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Jumper
Charge lamp
Jumper
N/-
Jumper
P/+ PR
Jumper
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
PX
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
PR
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
M
M
Power supply
Power supply
Motor
FR-F720P-18.5K to 30K
FR-F740P-22K, 30K
FR-F720P-37K to 55K
FR-F740P-37K to 55K
R1/L11 S1/L21
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Charge lamp
N/-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P/+
Jumper
M
Power supply
Jumper
PR
Jumper
Motor
N/-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P/+
Jumper
M
Power supply
FR-F740P-75K to 110K
Motor
FR-F720P-75K to 110K
FR-F740P-132K to 220K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
R1/L11 S1/L21
Jumper
Charge lamp
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
P/+
P/+
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
P/+
P/+
Power
supply
12
P/+
M
Motor
DC reactor
Power supply
For option
M
Motor
DC reactor
Motor
Wiring
FR-F740P-250K to 560K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
P/+
M
Motor
Power supply
DC reactor
CAUTION
 Handling of the wiring cover
(FR-F720P-18.5K, 22K, FR-F740P-22K, 30K)
For the hook of the wiring cover, cut off the necessary
parts using a pair of long-nose pliers etc.
CAUTION
Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If parts where
no wire is put through has been cut off (10mm or more),
protective structure (JEM1030) becomes an open type
(IP00).
13
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
· The power supply cables must be connected to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. (Phase sequence needs not to be matched.) Never connect
the power cable to the U, V, W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
· Connect the motor to U, V, W. At this time, turning ON the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates the motor in the
counterclockwise direction when viewed from the motor shaft.
· When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the 250K or higher, tighten a nut from the right side of the conductor. When
wiring two wires, place wires on both sides of the conductor. (Refer to the drawing below.) For wiring, use bolts (nuts) provided
with the inverter.
Wiring
(1) Cable size and other specifications of the main circuit terminals and the earthing terminal
Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% or less.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor
torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m.
200V class (when input power supply is 220V)
Terminal Tightening
Applicable
Screw
Torque
Inverter Model
Size *4
N·m
FR-F720P-0.75K
to 2.2K
FR-F720P-3.7K
FR-F720P-5.5K
FR-F720P-7.5K
FR-F720P-11K
FR-F720P-15K
FR-F720P-18.5K
FR-F720P-22K
FR-F720P-30K
FR-F720P-37K
FR-F720P-45K
FR-F720P-55K
FR-F720P-75K
FR-F720P-90K
FR-F720P-110K
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
14
Cable Size
Crimping
Terminal
2
Earthing
P/+, P1 (grounding)
cable
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
2-4
2
2
2
3.5
5.5
8
14
22
38
38
60
80
100
100
125
150
2100
3.5
5.5
14
14
22
38
38
60
80
100
100
150
2100
2100
M4
1.5
2-4
M4
M4
M5
M5
M5
M6
M8 (M6)
M8 (M6)
M8 (M6)
M10 (M8)
M10 (M8)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.4
7.8
7.8
7.8
14.7
14.7
24.5
24.5
24.5
5.5-4
5.5-4
14-5
14-5
22-5
38-6
38-8
60-8
80-8
100-10
100-10
150-12
150-12
100-12
AWG/MCM *2
HIV, etc. (mm ) *1
5.5-4
3.5
5.5-4
5.5
8-5
14
14-5
14
22-5
22
38-6
38
38-8
38
60-8
60
80-8
80
100-10 100
100-10 100
150-12 125
150-12 150
100-12 2100
PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
Earthing
R/L1,
S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
T/L3
cable
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.5
5.5
5.5
8
14
14
22
22
22
38
38
38
38
60
12
10
6
6
4
2
2
1/0
3/0
4/0
4/0
250
24/0
24/0
12
10
8
6
6 (*5)
2
2
1/0
3/0
4/0
4/0
250
24/0
24/0
4
6
16
16
25
35
35
50
70
95
95



4
6
10
16
25
35
35
50
70
95
95



4
6
16
16
16
25
25
25
35
50
50



The cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
75°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
The recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the
surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
For the 15K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 18.5K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
90°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding).
A screw for earthing (grounding) of the 22K or higher is indicated in parentheses.
When connecting the option unit to P/+, P1, N/-, use THHN cables for the option and terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W.
Wiring
400V class (when input power supply is 440V)
T/L3
FR-F740P-0.75K
to 3.7K
FR-F740P-5.5K
FR-F740P-7.5K
FR-F740P-11K
FR-F740P-15K
FR-F740P-18.5K
FR-F740P-22K
FR-F740P-30K
FR-F740P-37K
FR-F740P-45K
FR-F740P-55K
FR-F740P-75K
FR-F740P-90K
FR-F740P-110K
FR-F740P-132K
FR-F740P-160K
FR-F740P-185K
FR-F740P-220K
FR-F740P-250K
FR-F740P-280K
FR-F740P-315K
FR-F740P-355K
FR-F740P-400K
FR-F740P-450K
FR-F740P-500K
FR-F740P-560K
*1
*2
*3
*4
Cable Size
2
Earthing
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
P/+, P1
PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
AWG/MCM *2
HIV, etc. (mm ) *1
U, V, W
cable
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
(grounding)
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
2
2
14
14
2.5
M4
M4
M4
M5
M5
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8 (M10)
M10
M10
M10 (M12)
M10 (M12)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.4
4.4
4.4
7.8
7.8
7.8
14.7
14.7
14.7
14.7
24.5
24.5
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
2-4
5.5-4
5.5-4
8-5
14-5
14-6
22-6
22-6
38-8
60-8
60-8
60-10
80-10
100-10
150-10
150-12
100-12
100-12
150-12
150-12
200-12
C2-200
C2-250
C2-250
C2-200
2-4
5.5-4
5.5-4
8-5
8-5
14-6
22-6
22-6
38-8
60-8
60-8
60-10
80-10
100-10
150-10
150-12
100-12
100-12
150-12
150-12
200-12
C2-200
C2-250
C2-250
C2-200
2
3.5
5.5
8
14
14
22
22
38
60
60
60
80
100
125
150
2100
2100
2125
2150
2200
2200
2250
2250
3200
2
3.5
5.5
8
8
14
22
22
38
60
60
60
80
100
125
150
2100
2100
2125
2150
2200
2200
2250
2250
3200
3.5
3.5
5.5
8
14
22
22
22
38
60
60
80
100
100
150
2100
2100
2125
2125
2150
2200
2200
2250
3200
3200
3.5
3.5
5.5
5.5
8
14
14
14
22
22
22
22
22
38
38
38
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
2100
2100
12
12
10
8
6
6
4
4
1
1/0
1/0
3/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
24/0
24/0
2250
2300
2350
2400
2500
2500
3350
14
12
10
8
8
6
4
4
2
1/0
1/0
3/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
24/0
24/0
2250
2300
2350
2400
2500
2500
3350
2.5
4
6
10
16
16
25
25
50
50
50
50
70
95
120
150
295
295
2120
2150
2185
2185
2240
2240
3185
Earthing
U, V, W (grounding)
cable
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
4
6
10
10
10
10
16
16
16
25
16
25
16
50
25
50
25
50
25
50
25
70
35
95
50
120
70
150
95
295
95
295
95
2120 120
2150 150
2185 295
2185 295
2240 2120
2240 2120
3185 2150
For the 55K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable)) with continuous maximum
permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 75K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable)) with
continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and wiring is performed in an
enclosure.
For the 45K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 55K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHN cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
For the 45K or lower, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C. Assumes
that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 55K or higher, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in the Europe.)
The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding).
The screw size of the terminals P/+, N/-, and P1 in 75K is indicated in parentheses.
The screw size of the option connecting terminal P/+ in 132K and 160K is indicated in parentheses.
A screw for earthing (grounding) of the 185K or higher is indicated in parentheses.
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:
Line voltage drop [V]=
3 × wire resistance[mΩ/m] × wiring distance[m] × current[A]
1000
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque
reduction) in the low speed range.
CAUTION
· Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tighten too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
A screw that has been tighten too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
· Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
15
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Applicable
Inverter Model
Crimping
(Compression)
Terminal Tightening
Terminal
Screw
Torque
R/L1,
Size *4
N·m
S/L2,
U, V, W
Wiring
(2) Notes on earthing (grounding)
• Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and motor must be earthed (grounded). This
inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety
regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
A neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400V class inverter in compliance with EN standard must be used.
• Use the dedicated earth (ground) terminal to earth (ground) the inverter.
(Do not use the screw in the casing, chassis, etc.)
• Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. Use the cable whose size is equal to or greater than that indicated in page
14 and minimize the cable length. The earthing (grounding) point should be as close as possible to the inverter.
To be compliant with the EU Directive (Low Voltage Directive), earth (ground) the inverter according to
the instructions on page 169.
(3) Total wiring length
Under general-purpose motor control
Connect one or more general-purpose motors within the total wiring length shown in the following table.
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection Setting
(carrier frequency)
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K or Higher
2 (2kHz) or lower
3 (3kHz) or higher
300m
200m
500m
300m
500m
500m
Total wiring length when using a general-purpose motor (2.2K or higher)
300m
300m
500m or less
300m + 300m = 600m
REMARKS
When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. Take the following measures 1) or 2) in this case.
Under general-purpose motor control
1) Use a "400V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set frequency in Pr. 72 PWM frequency
selection according to wiring length.
Wiring Length
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection
50m or less
50m to 100m
exceeding 100m
15 (14.5kHz) or lower
9 (9kHz) or lower
4 (4kHz) or lower
2) Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) to the 55K or lower and the sine wave filter
(MT-BSL/BSC) to the 75K or higher on the inverter output side.
Refer to Chapter 3 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied) for the detail.
Under IPM motor control
Use the following length of cable or shorter when connecting an IPM motor.
Voltage class
Cable type
Unshielded cable
200V
Shielded cable
Unshielded cable
400V
Shielded cable
Pr. 72 setting
(carrier frequency)
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K or
higher
0 (2kHz) to 15 (14kHz)
5 (2kHz) or lower
6 (6kHz) or higher
5 (2kHz) or lower
6 to 9 (6kHz)
10 (10kHz) or higher
5 (2kHz) or lower
6 to 9 (6kHz)
10 (10kHz) or higher
100m
75m
50m
100m
50m
50m
75m
50m
50m
100m
100m
75m
100m
50m
50m
100m
50m
50m
100m
100m
100m
100m
100m
50m
100m
100m
50m
Use one dedicated IPM motor for one inverter. Multiple IPM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.
16
Wiring
CAUTION
· Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by the stray capacitances of the
wiring, leading to a malfunction of the overcurrent protective function or fast response current limit function or a malfunction or fault
of the equipment connected on the inverter output side. If fast-response current limit function malfunctions, disable this function.
(For Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection, refer to Chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· For details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection , refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied). (When using an optional
sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) for the 75K or higher, set "25" in Pr.72 (2.5kHz). (Sine wave filter can be only used with a generalpurpose motor.)
· The surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) option and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used under
IPM motor control, so do not connect them.
· For explanation of surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to the
manual of each option.
(4) Cable size of the control circuit power supply (terminal R1/L11, S1/L21)
· Terminal screw size: M4
· Cable size: 0.75mm2 to 2mm2
· Tightening torque: 1.5N·m
(5) When connecting the control circuit and the main circuit separately to the power supply
<Connection diagram>
When fault occurs, opening of the electromagnetic contactor (MC) on the
inverter power supply side results in power loss in the control circuit,
disabling the fault output signal retention. Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 are
provided for when retention of a fault signal is required. In this case, connect
the power supply terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 of the control circuit to the
primary side of the MC.
Do not connect the power cable to incorrect terminals. Doing so may
damage the inverter.
MC
R/L1 Inverter
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Remove the jumper
FR-F720P-0.75K to 5.5K, FR-F740P-0.75K to 5.5K
1) Loosen the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Remove the jumper
4) Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control
circuit to the lower terminals
(R1/L11, S1/L21).
3)
1)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
2)
4)
R1/L11
2
S1/L21
R1/L11
S1/L21
Main circuit terminal block
17
Wiring
FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K, FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K
1) Remove the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Remove the jumper.
4) Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control
circuit to the upper terminals
(R1/L11, S1/L21).
3)
1)
R1/L11
S1/L21
R1/L11
S1/L21
2)
4)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
Main circuit
terminal block
FR-F720P-15K, FR-F740P-15K or higher
1) Remove the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Pull the jumper toward you to
remove.
4) Connect the separate power supply
cable for the control circuit to the
upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
R1/ S1/
L11 L21 Power supply
terminal block
for the control circuit
R/L1S/L2 T/L3
3)
Power supply terminal block
for the control circuit
R1/L11
S1/L21
MC
Main power supply
FR-F720P-15K
FR-F740P-15K, 18.5K
1)
2)
4)
FR-F720P-18.5K to 30K FR-F720P-37K or higher
FR-F740P-37K or higher
FR-F740P-22K, 30K
Power supply
terminal block for
the control circuit
U
V
W
CAUTION
· Be sure to use the inverter with the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11, and S/L2 and S1/L21 removed when supplying
power from other sources. The inverter may be damaged if you do not remove the jumper.
· The voltage should be the same as that of the main control circuit when the control circuit power is supplied from other than the
primary side of the MC.
· The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter
capacity.
200V class
400V class
15K or lower
60VA
60VA
18.5K
80VA
60VA
22K or higher
80VA
80VA
· If the main circuit power is switched OFF (for 0.1s or more) then ON again, the inverter resets and a fault output will not be held.
18
Wiring
2.4.5
Control circuit terminals
indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 196 (I/O terminal function selection) (Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Terminal
Symbol
STF
STR
STOP
RH,
RM, RL
JOG
Contact input
RT
Terminal
Name
Forward
rotation start
Reverse
rotation start
Start selfholding
selection
Multi-speed
selection
Jog mode
selection
Second
function
selection
MRS
Output stop
RES
Reset
Terminal 4
input selection
AU
PTC input
CS
SD
PC
Selection of
automatic
restart after
instantaneous
power failure
Contact input
common (sink)
(initial setting)
External
transistor
common
(source)
24VDC power
supply common
External
transistor
common (sink)
(initial setting)
Contact input
common
(source)
24VDC power
supply
Rated
Specifications
Description
Turn ON the STF signal to start forward
rotation and turn it OFF to stop.
Turn ON the STR signal to start reverse
rotation and turn it OFF to stop.
When the STF and
STR signals are turned
ON simultaneously, the
stop command is given.
60
Turn ON the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal.
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH,
RM and RL signals.
Turn ON the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting)
and turn ON the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog operation.
Turn ON the RT signal to select second function.
When the second function such as "second torque boost" and
"second V/F (base frequency)" are set, turning ON the RT signal
selects these functions.
Turn ON the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter
output.
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by
electromagnetic brake.
Use to reset fault output provided when fault occurs.
Turn ON the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it OFF.
In the initial status, reset is set always-enabled. By setting Pr.75,
reset can be set enabled only at fault occurrence. Inverter
recovers about 1s after the reset is released.
Terminal 4 is valid only when the AU signal is turned ON. (The
frequency setting signal can be set between 0 and 20mADC.)
Turning the AU signal ON makes terminal 2 (voltage input)
invalid.
AU terminal is used as PTC input terminal (thermal protection of
the motor). When using it as PTC input terminal, set the AU/PTC
switch to PTC.
When the CS signal is left ON, the inverter restarts automatically at
power restoration. Note that restart setting is necessary for this
operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled.
Refer to
Page
*2
64
*2
*2
Input resistance
4.7k
Voltage at
opening 21 to
27VDC
Current at shortcircuited 4 to
6mADC
*2
2
115
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Type
(1) Input signals
68
*2
*2
(Refer to
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time in Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal
FM.
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a
transistor output (open collector output) device, such as a
programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by
undesirable currents.
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal).
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a
transistor output (open collector output) device, such as a
programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by
undesirable currents.
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
--------------------
—
Power supply
voltage range
19.2 to 28.8VDC
Permissible load
current 100mA
23
Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
19
Type
Wiring
Terminal
Symbol
10E
10
Frequency setting
2
4
Terminal
Name
Frequency
setting power
supply
Description
When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer at an initial
status, connect it to terminal 10.
Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when connecting it
to terminal 10E. (Refer to Pr. 73 Analog input selection in Chapter 4
of
Frequency
setting
(voltage)
Frequency
setting
(current)
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) provides the
maximum output frequency at 5V (10V, 20mA) and makes input
and output proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch from among input 0
to 5VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10VDC, and 0 to 20mA.
Set the voltage/current input switch in the ON position to select
current input (0 to 20mA).*1
Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the
maximum output frequency at 20mA (5V, 10V) makes input and
output proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU
signal is ON (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr. 267 to switch
from among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to
10VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch in the OFF position
to select voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).*1
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Rated
Specifications
10VDC
Permissible load
current 10mA
5VDC
Permissible load
current 10mA
Voltage input:
Input resistance
10k± 1k
Maximum
permissible
voltage 20VDC
Current input:
Input resistance
245± 5
Maximum
permissible
current 30mA
Refer to
Page
*2
58, 66
58, 66
Voltage/current
input switch
2
4
59, 68
Switch 1
Switch 2
1
Frequency
setting
auxiliary
Inputting 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10VDC adds this signal to terminal
2 or 4 frequency setting signal. Use Pr.73 to switch between the
input 0 to ±5VDC and 0 to ±10VDC (initial setting).
Input resistance
10k± 1k
Maximum
permissible voltage
± 20VDC
*2
5
Frequency
setting
common
Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4)
and analog output terminal AM. Do not earth (ground).
--------------------
------
*1
Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Applying a voltage signal with voltage/current input switch ON (current input is selected) or a current signal with switch OFF (voltage input is
selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of signal output devices.
*2
Refer to Chapter 4 of
20
the Instruction Manual (Applied).
Wiring
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal
Name
Description
Rated Specifications
A1,
B1,
C1
Relay output 1
(Fault output)
1 changeover contact output indicates that the
inverter’s protective function has activated and the
output stopped.
Fault: No conduction between B and C (conduction
between A and C)
Normal: Conduction between B and C (No conduction
between A and C)
Contact capacity 230VAC 0.3A
(Power factor=0.4)
30VDC 0.3A
A2,
B2,
C2
Relay output 2
1 changeover contact output
RUN
Inverter
running
SU
Up to
frequency
OL
Overload
warning
IPF
Instantaneous
power failure
FU
Frequency
detection
Pulse
Analog
FM
AM
* Refer to Chapter 4 of
*
*
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is
equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial
value 0.5Hz). Switched high during stop or DC
injection brake operation.
Switched low when the output
frequency reaches within the range
of ±10% (initial value) of the set
frequency. Switched high during
acceleration/deceleration and at a
stop.
Switched low when stall prevention is
activated by the stall prevention
function. Switched high when stall
Alarm code
prevention is cancelled.
(4 bits) output
Switched low when an instantaneous
power failure and under voltage
protections are activated.
Switched low when the inverter
output frequency is equal to or higher
than the preset detected frequency
and high when less than the preset
detected frequency.
Open collector
Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU
output common
Output item:
Select one e.g. output frequency
Output
from monitor items. (Not output
For meter
frequency
during inverter reset.)
(initial setting)
The output signal is proportional to
the magnitude of the corresponding
monitoring item.
Output item:
To set a full-scale value for
Output
Analog signal
monitoring the output frequency and frequency
output
the output current, set Pr.55 and
(initial setting)
Pr.56. *
SE
Refer
to
Page
*
Permissible load 24VDC
(27VDC maximum) 0.1A
(A voltage drop is 3.4V
maximum when the signal is
ON.)
Low is when the open collector
output transistor is ON
(conducts).
High is when the transistor is
OFF (does not conduct).
*
*
*
2
*
--------------------
-----
Permissible load current 2mA
1440 pulses/s at full scale
*
Output signal 0 to 10VDC
Permissible load current 1mA
(load impedance 10k or
more) Resolution 8 bits
*
the Instruction Manual (Applied).
Type
(3) Communication
Terminal
Symbol
RS-485 terminals
RS-485
—
Terminal
Name
PU
connector
RXD-
Inverter
transmission
terminal
Inverter
reception
terminal
SG
Earth (Ground)
TXD+
TXDRXD+
Description
Refer to
Page
With the PU connector, communication can be established through RS-485.
(for connection on a 1:1 basis only)
Conforming standard
: EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission format
: Multidrop link
Communication speed : 4800 to 38400bps
Overall length
: 500m
25
With the RS-485 terminals, communication can be established through RS-485.
Conforming standard
: EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission format
: Multidrop link
Communication speed : 300 to 38400bps
Overall length
: 500m
26
21
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Open collector
Relay
Type
(2) Output signals
Wiring
2.4.6
Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to sink logic (SINK) when shipped from the factory.
To change the control logic, the jumper connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the
other position.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.)
1) Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be
removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2) Change the jumper connector set to the sink logic (SINK) on the rear panel of the control circuit terminal block to
source logic (SOURCE).
Jumper connector
3) Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
CAUTION
 Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly.
 While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block.
22
Wiring
4) Sink logic and source logic
 In sink logic, a signal switches ON when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
 In source logic, a signal switches ON when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when source logic is selected
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected
Source logic
Sink logic
PC
Current
STF
STR
Sink
connector
R
Current
STF
R
STR
Source
connector
R
R
SD
DC input (sink type)
<Example: QX40>
RUN
TB1
Inverter
DC input (source type)
<Example: QX80>
TB1
RUN
R
R
R
SE
-
R
+ TB17
SE
- TB18
+
2
24VDC
24VDC
Current flow
Current flow
 When using an external power supply for transistor output
 Source logic type
 Sink logic type
Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform
Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal PC of
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal SD of
the inverter with terminal +24V of the external power
the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power
supply. When using terminals PC and SD as a 24VDC
supply. When using terminals PC and SD as a 24VDC
power supply, do not install an external power supply in
power supply, do not install a power supply in parallel in
parallel with the inverter. Doing so may cause a
the outside of the inverter. Doing so may cause a
malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents.)
malfunction due to undesirable current.)
Inverter
QY40P type transistor
output unit
TB1 STF
QY80 type transistor
output unit
PC
24VDC
(SD)
TB17
PC
TB18
24VDC SD
Current flow
Constant
voltage
circuit
Fuse
TB1
STF
TB2
STR
TB17
TB18
24VDC
TB2 STR
Constant
voltage
circuit
Inverter
24VDC
(SD)
SD
Current flow
23
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Inverter
Wiring
2.4.7
Wiring of control circuit
(1) Control circuit terminal layout
Control circuit terminal
A1
B1
C1
RL RM RH
SE
RUN
A2
RT
B2
C2 10E
10
2
AU STOP MRS RES SD
SU IPF OL
FU
SD
SD
5
FM
4
Terminal screw size: M3.5
Tightening torque: 1.2N·m
1
AM
STF STR JOG CS
PC
(2) Common terminals of the control circuit (SD 5, SE)
 Terminals SD, 5, and SE are all common terminals (0V) for I/O signals and are isolated from each other. Do not
earth(ground) these terminals. Avoid connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.
 Terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, STOP, RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS,
RES, AU, CS) and the pulse train output terminal (FM). The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control
circuit by photocoupler.
 Terminal 5 is a common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. It
should be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable.
 Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal (RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU). The contact input
circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
(3) Signal inputs by contactless switches
The contacted input terminals of the inverter (STF, STR, STOP,
RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, CS) can be controlled
using a transistor instead of a contacted switch as shown on the
right.
External signal input using transistor
+24V
STF, etc
Inverter
SD
(4) Wiring instructions
 It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or the
cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel contact fault.
 The maximum wiring length should be 30m (200m for terminal FM).
 When using contact inputs, use two or more parallel micro-signal
contacts or twin contacts to prevent a contact faults since the control
circuit input signals are micro-currents.
Micro signal contacts
Twin contacts
 To suppress EMI, use shielded or twisted cables for the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main
and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit). For the cables connected to the control circuit
terminals, connect their shields to the common terminal of the connected control circuit terminal. When connecting
external power supply to the terminal PC, however, connect the shield of the power supply cable to the negative side
of the external power supply. Do not directly earth (ground) the shield to the enclosure, etc.
 Always apply a voltage to the fault output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc.
24
Wiring
 Wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or higher
For wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or higher, separate away from wiring of the main circuit.
Make cuts in rubber bush of the inverter side and lead wires.
<Wiring>
Rubber bush
(view from the inside)
Make cuts along the lines inside with
a cutter knife and such.
2.4.8
Mounting the operation panel (FR-DU07) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07)
on the enclosure surface
Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2)(option)
Parameter unit (FR-PU07) Operation panel(FR-DU07)
(option)
STF FWD PU
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP)(option)
CAUTION
Do not connect the cable to a LAN port of a personal computer, to a fax modem socket, or to a telephone connector. Doing so may
damage the inverter and the connected device due to the differences in the electric specifications.
REMARKS
 Refer to page 6 for the removal of the operation panel.
 Overall wiring length when the operation panel is connected: 20m
 Parameter unit connection cables can be also fabricated with the communication connectors and communication cables listed in
Chapter 4 of
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Having an operation panel or a parameter unit on the enclosure surface is convenient.
With a connection cable, you can mount the operation panel (FR-DU07) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) to the
enclosure surface, and connect it to the inverter.
Use the option FR-CB2, or connectors and cables available on the market.
(For mounting the operation panel (FR-DU07), the optional connector (FR-ADP) is required.)
Securely insert one end of connection cable until the stoppers are fixed.
the Instruction Manual (Applied).
25
Wiring
2.4.9





RS-485 terminal block
Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485)
Transmission format: Multidrop link
Communication speed: MAX 38400bps
Overall length: 500m
Connection cable:Twisted pair cable
(4 pairs)
OPEN
100Ω
Terminating resistor switch
Initially set to "OPEN".
Set only the terminating resistor switch of
the remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.
RDA1 RDB1 RDA2 RDB2
(RXD1+)(RXD1-)(RXD2+)(RXD2-)
TXD
RXD
SDA1 SDB1 SDA2 SDB2
(TXD1+)(TXD1-) (TXD2+) (TXD2-)
P5S SG
P5S
SG
(VCC) (GND) (VCC) (GND)
VCC
2.4.10 Communication operation
Using the PU connector or RS-485 terminal, you can
perform communication operation from a personal
computer etc. When the PU connector is connected
with a personal, FA or other computer by a
communication cable, a user program can run and
monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
For the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link
operation), communication can be performed with the
PU connector and RS-485 terminal.
For the Modbus-RTU protocol, communication can be
performed with the RS-485 terminal.
For further details, refer to Chapter 4 of
Instruction Manual (Applied).
26
the
Programmable controller
Multidrop link
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
(32 inverters
maximum are
connectable)
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units
The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.
Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in
accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.
2.5.1
Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2)
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2) as shown below to improve the braking capability at deceleration.
(1) Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor
ON
T
OFF OCR contact
*2
MC
MC
MC
Three-phase AC
power supply
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
Motor
M
*3
Inverter
P/+
N/-
*1
10m or less
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*3
FR-BU2
PR
A
B
P/+
C
N/BUE
SD
Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
Keep a wiring distance of within 5m between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor. Even when the wiring
is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m. When twisting, twist at least 5 times per meter.
The brake unit may be damaged if cables are not twisted when the wiring length is 5m or more or the wiring length exceeds
10m or more even if cables are twisted.
It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of discharging resistors.
Refer to FR-BU2 manual for connection method of discharging resistor.
<Recommended external thermal relay>
Brake Unit
Discharging Resistor
Recommended External Thermal Relay
FR-BU2-1.5K
GZG 300W-50 (one)
TH-N20CXHZ 1.3A
FR-BU2-3.7K
GRZG 200-10 (three in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A
FR-BU2-7.5K
GRZG 300-5 (four in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A
FR-BU2-15K
GRZG 400-2 (six in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 11A
FR-BU2-H7.5K
GRZG 200-10 (six in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A
FR-BU2-H15K
GRZG 300-5 (eight in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A
FR-BU2-H30K
GRZG 400-2 (twelve in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 11A
1/L1
5/L3
TH-N20
2/T1
To the brake
unit terminal P/+
6/T3
To a resistor
CAUTION
 Set "1" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use GRZG type discharging resistor.
 Do not remove the jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
27
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
MCCB
GRZG type
OCR discharging resistor *5
R
R
External thermal
relay *4
Connection of stand-alone option units
(2) FR-BR-(H) connection example with resistor unit
ON
T
OFF
*2
MC
MC
MCCB
FR-BR
MC
Motor
U
V
W
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Three phase AC
power supply
P TH1 *4
PR
TH2
M
*3
Inverter
P/+
N/-
*1
*3
FR-BU2
PR
A
P/+
B
N/C
BUE
SD
10m or less
*1
*2
*3
*4
Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m. Even when the
wiring is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m.
The contact between TH1 and TH2 is closed in the normal status and is open at a fault.
CAUTION
 Do not remove the jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
(3) Connection example with MT-BR5 type resistor unit
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set the following parameters:
 Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "1"
 Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty = "0 (initial value)"
Set Pr. 0 Brake mode selection = "2" in the brake unit FR-BU2.
T
MCCB
ON
MC
R/L1 U
S/L2 V
T/L3 W
Three phase AC
power supply
P/+
N/-
Inverter
*5
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*2
Motor
M
*1
*3
OFF CR1
MC
MC
10m *3
or less
P
N
BUE
SD
P
PR
Brake unit
FR-BU2
P
PR
CR1
TH1
TH2
*4
Resistor unit
MT-BR5
Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (MT-BR5) should be within 5m. If twisted wires
are used, the distance should be within 10m.
The contact between TH1 and TH2 is open in the normal status and is closed at a fault.
CN8 connector used with the MT-BU5 type brake unit is not used.
CAUTION
 The stall prevention (overvoltage), oL, does not occur while Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "1" and Pr. 70 Special
regenerative brake duty = "0% (initial setting)."
Parameters referred to 
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection
Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty
28
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.2
Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5)
When connecting the brake unit (FR-BU(H)/MT-BU5) to improve the brake capability at deceleration, make connection
as shown below.
(1) Connection with the FR-BU (55K or lower)
ON
OFF
T *2
MC
FR-BR
MC
MCCB
Three-phase AC
power supply
MC
R/L1
U
Motor
S/L2
V
M
T/L3
W
P
PR
TH2
Inverter
FR-BU
PR
P/+
N/−
TH1
*1
HA
P/+
HB
N/−
HC
*3
10m or less
*1
*2
*3
Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU (H)) terminals so that their terminal signals match
with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m. If
twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10m.
2
29
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CAUTION
 If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a
magnetic contactor on the inverter’s input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault.
 Do not remove the jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
Connection of stand-alone option units
(2) Connection with the MT-BU5 (75K or higher)
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set the following parameters:
 Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "1"
 Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty = "10%"
T *1
ON
MCCB
OFF
CR1
CR2
MC
U
Motor
S/L2
V
M
T/L3
W
R/L1
Three-phase
AC power
supply
MC
MC
10m or *2
less
Inverter
P/+
N/
P
PR
CR1
P
TH1
PR
TH2
CR2
CN8
P
PR
P
TH1
PR
TH2
Brake unit
MT-BU5
*1
*2
Resistor unit
MT-BR5
When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
The wiring length between the resistor unit and brake resistor should be 10m maximum when wires are
twisted and 5m maximum when wires are not twisted.
CAUTION
 Install the brake unit in a place where a cooling air reaches the brake unit heatsink and within a distance of the cable supplied
with the brake unit reaches the inverter.
 For wiring of the brake unit and inverter, use an accessory cable supplied with the brake unit. Connect the main circuit cable to
the inverter terminals P/+ and N/- and connect the control circuit cable to the CN8 connector inside by making cuts in the rubber
bush at the top of the inverter for leading the cable.
 The brake unit which uses multiple resistor units has terminals equal to the number of resistor units. Connect one resistor unit
to one pair of terminal (P, PR).
<Inserting the CN8 connector>
Make cuts in rubber bush of the upper portion of the inverter and lead a cable.
1) Make cuts in the rubber bush for leading the CN8 connector cable with a nipper or cutter knife.
Rubber bushes
Make cuts in
rubber bush
2) Insert a connector on the MT-BU5 side through a rubber bush to connect to a connector on the inverter side.
CN8 connector
Wire clamp
CAUTION
Clamp the CN8 connector cable on the inverter side with a wire clamp securely.
Parameters referred to 
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection
Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty
30
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
Insert the connector until
you hear a click sound.
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.3
Connection of the brake unit (BU type)
Connect the brake unit (BU type) correctly as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Remove the
jumper across terminals HB and PC and terminals TB and HC of the brake unit and fit it across terminals PC and TB.
ON
OFF
T*
MC
MCCB
Three-phase
AC power
supply
MC
Inverter
U
Motor
R/L1
V
M
S/L2
W
MC
Brake unit
(BU type)
T/L3
Remove the
jumper
TB
N/-
N
P/+
OCR HC
HB
HA
Discharging
resistor
OCR
PR
PC
Fit a jumper
P
* When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
CAUTION
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and discharging resistor should be within 2m. If twisted wires are used, the
distance should be within 5m.
 If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a
magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off a current in case of fault.
 Do not remove the jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).
31
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.4
Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC2)
When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as
shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and the inverter.
Perform the wiring securely, and set Pr.19 Base frequency voltage (under V/F control) = "rated motor voltage" and Pr.30
Regenerative function selection = "2".
Outside box
(FR-HCB2)*10
Reactor1
MCCB
MC
Three-phase
AC power
supply
(FR-HCL21)
*7
R/
L1
S/
L2
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
T2/
L32
T/
L3
High power
factor converter
Reactor2
(FR-HCL22)
*7
R2/
L12
S2/
L22
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T2/
L32
T3/
L33
*7
R3/
L13
S3/
L23
T3/
L33
*8
*8
ROH1
ROH2
88R
88S
*8
R4/
L14
S4/
L24
T4/
L34
*7
Inverter
(FR-HC2)
*1
R/L1
U
S/L2
V
T/L3 W
R1/L11
S1/L21
R4/L14
S4/L24
T4/L34
Fuse *9
P/+
N/-
ROH
SD
88R RDY
88S *4 IPF
R/L1 RSO
S/L2 *6
SE
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21 *8
P/+
N/*5
Motor
M
Earth
(ground)
*2
X10 *3
X11 *3
RES
SD
*8
*1
Remove the jumpers between terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 as well as between S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the power supply for the control
circuit to across terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option fault) will occur. (Refer to page 126.))
*2 Do not install an MCCB for the terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P and P/+ or between N and N/-). Connecting the opposite polarity of
terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.
*3 Assign the X10 (X11) signal to a terminal using any of the Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 103)
For RS-485 or any other communication where the start command is only transmitted once, use the X11 signal to save the operation mode at the
time of an instantaneous power failure.
*4 Assign the IPF signal to an FR-HC2 terminal. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HC2.)
*5 Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the FR-HC2 to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and connect terminal SE of the
FR-HC2 to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting, FR-HC2 will be damaged.
*6 Always connect terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 of the FR-HC2 to the power supply. Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage
the FR-HC2.
*7 Do not install an MCCB or MC between the reactor 1 terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and the FR-HC2 terminals (R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34). It will not
operate properly.
*8 Securely perform grounding (earthing) by using the grounding (earthing) terminal.
*9 Installation of a fuse is recommended. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HC2.)
*10 Outside box is not available for 280K or higher. Connect filter capacitors, inrush current limit resistors, and magnetic contactors.
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HC2.)
CAUTION
 The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 and the voltage phases of terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 must
be matched.
 Match the control logic (sink logic / source logic) of the high power factor converter and the inverter. (Refer to 2.4.6 Changing the
control logic)
 Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when FR-HC2 is connected.
Parameters referred to 
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection
32
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.5
Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
When connecting the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) (55K or lower), make connection so that the
inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and the terminal symbols of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) are the
same.
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection.
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Dedicated stand-alone
reactor (FR-CVL) *5
MCCB
MC1
R/L11
S/L21
T/L31
Three-phase
AC power
supply
R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32
R/L11
S/L21 *4
T/MC1
*3
*4
*5
Motor
V
M
W
P/+
N/−
P24
SD
RDYA
PC
SD
*2
*6
X10 *3
RES
Remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and terminals S/L2 and S1/L21 of the inverter,
and connect the control circuit power supply across terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect
anything to the power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
(E.OPT (option fault) will occur. (Refer to page 126.))
Do not insert the MCCB between the terminals P/+ andN/- (between P/L+ andP/+, between N/L- andN/). Opposite polarity of terminals N/-, P/+ will damage the inverter.
Assign the terminal for X10 signal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
(Refer to page 103.)
Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1.
Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common converter.
Be sure to connect terminal RDYB of the FR-CV to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the
inverter, and connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting,
FR-CV will be damaged.
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
*2
U
Inverter
P/L+
N/L−
RDYB
RSO
SE
*1
R1/L11
S1/L21
FR-CV type
Power regeneration
common converter
R2/L1
S2/L2
T2/L3
*1
CAUTION
 The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 and terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, T2/L3 must be matched.
 Use sink logic (initial setting) when the FR-CV is connected. The FR-CV cannot be connected when source logic is selected.
 Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when FR-CV is connected.
Parameters referred to 
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
33
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.6
Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
When connecting a power regeneration converter (MT-RC) (75K or higher), perform wiring securely as shown below.
Incorrect connection will damage the regeneration converter and inverter. After connecting securely, set "1" in
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and "0" in Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty.
Inverter
MCCB
MC2
MC1
Three-phase
AC power
supply
R/L1
U
Motor
S/L2
V
M
T/L3
W
R1/L11
S1/L21
DCL
P1
P1
P/+ N/
P
MT-RCL
P
R
R2
S
S2
T
T2
N
R2
Reset signal
RES
STF
SD
S2
C
T2
B
Alarm signal
A
R
S
RDY
T
Ready signal
R1
SE
S1
MT-RC
CAUTION
 When using the FR-F700P series together with the MTRC, install a magnetic contactor (MC) at the input side of
the inverter so that power is supplied to the inverter after
1s or more has elapsed after powering ON the MT-RC.
When power is supplied to the inverter prior to the MTRC, the inverter and the MT-RC may be damaged or the
MCCB may trip or be damaged.
 Refer to the MT-RC manual for precautions for
connecting the power coordination reactor and others.
MT-RC power supply (MC1)
Parameters referred to 
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection
Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty
34
ON
Inverter power supply (MC2)
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
ON
1s or more
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.7
Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL)
(1) Keep the surrounding air temperature within the permissible range (-10C to +50C). Keep enough clearance
around the reactor because it heats up. (Take 10cm or more clearance on top and bottom and 5cm or more on left
and right regardless of the installation direction.)
10cm or more
5cm or
more
5cm or
more
5cm or
more
5cm or
more
(2) When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it between terminals P1 and P/+.
For the 55K or lower, the jumper connected across terminals P1 and P/+ must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor
will not exhibit its performance.
For the 75K or higher, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor.
P1
P/+
FR-HEL
For the 55K or lower,
remove the jumper.
CAUTION
 The wiring distance should be within 5m.
 The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and the
earthing (grounding) cable. (Refer to page 14)
 Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when FR-HC2 or FR-CV is connected.
35
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(3) The DC reactor (FR-HEL) is electrically connected to the enclosure through mounting screws when the DC reactor
is securely mounted to the enclosure. If the DC reactor is not earthed (grounded) securely enough, an earthing
(grounding) cable may be used.
When you are using an earthing (grounding) cable with a 55K or lower capacity inverter, wire the cable to the
installation hole where varnish is removed. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-HEL.)
For 75K or higher, use an earth (ground) terminal to perform earthing (grounding). (Refer to page 153)
Power-OFF and magnetic contactor
(MC)
2.6 Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC)
(1) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes.
(Refer to page 4 for selection.)
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g.
emergency stop operation).
2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure
3)To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work
If using an MC for emergency stop during operation, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as
JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
REMARKS
Since repeated inrush current at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is 1,000,000 times (about
500,000 times for the 200V class 37K or higher)), frequent starts/stops must be avoided. Turn ON/OFF the inverter start
controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
MCCB
• Inverter start/stop circuit example
MC
Power
supply
R/L1
U
S/L2
V
T/L3
W
R1/L11
*2
S1/L21
T *1
Inverter
Operation preparation
MC
OFF
ON
MC
Stop
B1
or stop.
*1 When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
*2 Connect the power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21
of the control circuit to the primary side of the MC to
hold an alarm signal when the inverter's protective
circuit is activated. At this time, remove jumpers
across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11, and S/L2 and S1/
L21. (Refer to page 17 for removal of the jumper.)
A1
MC
Start/Stop
Start
C1
As shown on the left, always use the start signal
To the (ON or OFF of STF (STR) signal) to make a start
motor
RA
RA
STF/STR
SD
RA
(2) Handling of the inverter output side magnetic contactor
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and general-purpose motor only when both the inverter and motor
are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the
inverter and such will activate. When using a magnetic contactor to switch to a commercial power supply while using a
general-purpose motor, it is recommended to use the electronic bypass function Pr. 135 to Pr. 139. (Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied)).
CAUTION
IPM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets embedded in the rotor. Motor terminals hold high-voltage while the
motor is running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. Before wiring or inspection, the motor must be confirmed to be stopped.
When the motor is driven by the load in applications such as fan and blower, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected at the
inverter's output side, and wiring and inspection must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
36
Precautions for use of the inverter
2.7 Precautions for use of the inverter
The FR-F700P series is a highly reliable product, but using incorrect peripheral circuits or incorrect operation/handling
methods may shorten the product life or damage the product.
Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
(1) Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
(2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform
such wiring.
(3) After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in
an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
(4) Use cables of the appropriate size to make a voltage drop of 2% or less.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque
to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
Refer to page 14 for the recommended cable sizes.
(5) The total wiring length should be within the prescribed length.
Especially for long distance wiring, the fast-response current limit function may decrease, or the equipment connected to
the output side may malfunction. This is caused by a charging current due to the stray capacity of the wiring. Therefore,
note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 16)
(6) Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize
interference. (Refer to page 10)
(8)
For some short time after the power is switched OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor.
When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and
then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter is no more than 30VDC using a
tester, etc.
(9) A short circuit or earth (ground) fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by
peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation
resistance may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and phase to phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-ON.
Especially for an old motor or use in a hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.
(10) Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter.
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000
times (For the 200V class 37K or higher, switching life is about 500,000)), frequent starts and stops of the MC must be
avoided.
Always use the start signal (ON/OFF of STF and STR signals) to start/stop the inverter. (Refer to page 9)
(11) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits.
Application of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may
damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected
incorrectly to short terminals 10E and 5.
(12) When driving a general-purpose motor, provide
electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2
which are used for bypass operation.
When the wiring is incorrect or if there is an electronic
bypass circuit as shown on the right, the inverter will be
damaged when the power supply when it is connected to the
inverter U, V, W terminals due to arcs generated at the time
of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence error.
MC1
Power
supply
Interlock
R/L1 U
IM
S/L2 V
MC2
T/L3 W Undesirable current
Inverter
37
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter
output side.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are
installed, immediately remove it.
Precautions for use of the inverter
(13) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor
in the inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the
power is restored.
(14) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter input side, connect an MC for the following purposes. (Refer to page 4 for selection.)
1)To release the inverter from the power supply when a fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g. emergency
stop operation).
2)To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power
failure
3)To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work.
If using an MC for emergency stop during operation, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038AC-3 class rated current.
(15) Handling of inverter output side magnetic contactor
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When
the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will
activate. When MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply, for example, switch it ON/OFF after the
inverter and motor have stopped.
IPM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets embedded in the rotor. Motor terminals hold highvoltage while the motor is running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. Before wiring or inspection, the motor
must be confirmed to be stopped. When the motor is driven by the load in applications such as fan and blower, a lowvoltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter's output side, and wiring and inspection must be performed
while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
(16) Countermeasures against inverter-generated EMI
If electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter causes frequency setting signal to fluctuate and motor rotation
speed to be unstable when changing motor speed with analog signal, the following countermeasures are effective.
· Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
· Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables (inverter I/O cables).
· Use shield cables as signal cables.
· Install a ferrite core on the signal cable (Example: ZCAT3035-1330 TDK).
(17) Instructions for overload operation
When performing an operation of frequent start/stop of the inverter, increase/decrease in the temperature of the
transistor element of the inverter may repeat due to a continuous flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal
fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing bound current,
starting current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient
torque and the motor may not start. A counter action for this is to raise the permissible current level by increasing the
inverter capacity (up to 2 ranks) when using a general-purpose motor, and by increasing the inverter and IPM motor
capacities when using an IPM motor.
(18) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
38
Failsafe of the system which uses
the inverter
2.8 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips to output a fault signal. However, a fault output signal may not be output at an inverter
fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although Mitsubishi assures best quality products,
provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents such as damage to machine when the
inverter fails for some reason and at the same time consider the system configuration where failsafe from outside the inverter,
without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.
(1) Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals
By combining the inverter status output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter alarm can be
detected.
Interlock Method
Check Method
Used Signals
1)
Inverter protective
function operation
Operation check of an alarm contact
Circuit error detection by negative logic
Fault output signal
ALM signal
2)
Inverter running status
Operation ready signal checks
Operation ready signal
(RY signal)
3)
Inverter running status
Logic check of the start signal and
running signal
4)
Inverter running status
Logic check of the start signal and
output current
Start signal
(STF signal, STR signal)
Running signal (RUN signal)
Start signal
(STF signal, STR signal)
Output current detection signal
Y12 signal
Refer to Page
Refer to Chapter 4
of the Instruction
Manual (Applied)
Refer to Chapter 4
of the Instruction
Manual (Applied)
Refer to Chapter 4
of the Instruction
Manual (Applied)
Refer to Chapter 4
of the Instruction
Manual (Applied)
(2) Backup method outside the inverter
Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure
status of the inverter itself. For example, when the inverter CPU fails, even if the interlock is provided using the inverter
fault signal, start signal and RUN signal, there is a case where a fault signal is not output and RUN signal is kept output
even if an inverter fault occurs.
Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current and consider the
backup system such as checking up as below according to the level of importance of the system.
1) Start signal and actual operation check
Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to
the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the motor
current runs as the motor is running for the period until the motor stops since the inverter starts decelerating even if the
start signal turns off. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time. In addition, it is
recommended to check the three-phase current when using the current detector.
2) Command speed and actual operation check
Check if there is no gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter speed command
and detected speed of the speed detector.
Controller
System failure
Inverter
Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)
To the alarm detection sensor
39
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
No.
Setting procedure of IPM motor control
<IPM>
3 DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR
IPM
<IPM>
Highly efficient motor control and highly accurate motor speed control can be performed by using the inverter with an IPM motor.
The motor speed is detected by the output voltage and current of the inverter. It does not require a speed detector such as an
encoder. The inverter drives the IPM motor with the least required current when a load is applied in order to achieve the
highest motor efficiency.
POINT
The following conditions must be met to perform IPM motor control.
· For the motor model, a dedicated IPM motor (MM-EFS model, MM-THE4 model, or MM-EF model) must be used.
· The motor capacity must be equivalent to the inverter capacity. (The 0.75K inverter can be used with the 0.4kW MM-EF.)
· Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) must be performed.
· The overall wiring length with the motor must be within the specified value. (Refer to page 16)
3.1 Setting procedure of IPM motor control
IPM
<IPM>
· This inverter is set for a general-purpose motor in the initial setting. Follow the following procedure to change the setting for the
IPM motor control.
Perform IPM parameter initialization by selecting the parameter setting mode (IPM) on the operation panel.* (Refer to page 41)
Set "1" or "12" in
(IPM parameter initialization) to select IPM motor
control. Refer to page 41 for the setting method.
Setting value "1": MM-EF
Setting value "12": MM-EFS, MM-THE4
P.RUN on the operation panel (FR-DU07) is lit when IPM motor control is set.
Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting.
Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multispeed setting as required.
Set the operation command. (Refer to page 77)
Select the start command and speed command.
Test run
* IPM parameter initialization is performed by setting Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization or by selecting
(IPM parameter initialization) on the
operation panel. To change to the IPM motor control, perform IPM parameter initialization at first. If parameter initialization is performed after setting
other parameters, some of those parameters will be initialized too. (Refer to page 42 for the parameters that are initialized.)
REMARKS
· "Er1" appears if IPM parameter initialization is performed while Pr.72 = "25."
· To use a 0.4kW MM-EF, set Pr.80 Motor capacity = "0.4" before setting IPM parameter initialization.
· IPM motor control can also be selected with Pr. 80 Motor capacity and Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization. (Refer to page 42)
CAUTION
· For the setting range of a speed command under dedicated IPM motor (MM-EFS/MM-THE4 1500r/min specification, MM-EF 1800r/min
specification) controls, refer to the output frequency range in Chapter 8.2 Common specifications (Refer to page 151).
· The selectable carrier frequencies under IPM motor control are 2k, 6k, 10k, and 14kHz. (Only 2k and 6kHz are selectable for 75K or higher.)
· Constant-speed operation cannot be performed in the low-speed range lower than 150r/min (MM-EFS, MM-THE4 1500r/min specification)
or 180r/min (MM-EF 1800r/min specification). Generally, speed control can be performed in the range that satisfies the ratio, 1:10.
· During IPM motor control, the RUN signal is output about 100ms after turning ON the start command (STF, STR). The delay is due to the
magnetic pole detection.
· The following operations and controls are disabled during IPM motor control: adjustable 5 points V/F, bypass sequence, energy saving
operation, Optimum excitation control, and speed smoothing.
· The option surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used under IPM motor
control, so do not connect them.
· When parameter copy is performed from an FR-F700P series inverter, which is set to use MM-EFS or MM-THE4 under IPM motor control,
check that IPM motor control is selected on the operation panel (P.RUN is lit) after the copy. When parameters are copied to an FR-F700P
series inverter, which is not compatible with MM-EFS or MM-THE4, Simple magnetic flux vector control is selected instead of IPM motor
control.
40
Setting procedure of IPM motor control
<IPM>
(1) IPM motor control setting by selecting the parameter setting mode on the operation panel (
)
POINT
· The parameters required to drive an IPM motor are automatically changed as a batch. (Refer to page 42.)
Operation example
Initialize the parameter setting for a premium high-efficiency IPM motor (MM-EFS, MM-THE4) by selecting the
parameter setting mode on the operation panel.
Display
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
2. Parameter setting mode
Press
to choose the parameter setting
mode.
3. Selecting the parameter
Turn
until
(IPM parameter
initialization) appears.
4. Displaying the setting
Press
"
to read the currently set value.
" (initial value) appears.
5. Selecting the setting
Turn
to change it to the set value "
".
6. Parameter setting
Press
to set.
Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!!
P.RUN indicator is lit.
0
1
12
22, 32
to read another parameter.
Press
to show the setting again.
Press
twice to show the automatic parameter setting (AUTO).
3
Description
Parameter settings for a general-purpose motor
Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF (rotations per minute)
Parameter settings for a premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS and MM-THE4
(rotations per minute)
For manufacturer setting. (Do not set.)
REMARKS
· Performing IPM parameter initialization by selecting the parameter setting mode on the operation panel automatically changes
the Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization setting.
· The parameter initialization sets the same capacity as the inverter capacity to Pr. 80 Motor capacity. To use a 0.4kW MM-EF, set Pr. 80
Motor capacity = "0.4" before performing IPM parameter initialization by selecting the parameter setting mode on the operation panel.
· The IPM parameter setting is displayed as "1, 12" in the parameter setting mode even if Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization = "101, 112."
(2) IPM motor control display and IPM motor control signal
P.RUN on the operation panel (FR-DU07) is lit and the IPM motor control signal (IPM) is output during IPM motor control.
For the terminal to output the IPM motor control signal, assign the function by setting "57 (positive logic)" or "157
(negative logic)" to any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
41
DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM>
Setting
Turn
Initializing the parameters required to drive
an IPM motor (Pr.998) <IPM>
3.2 Initializing the parameters required to drive an IPM motor
(Pr.998) IPM
<IPM>
· By performing IPM parameter initialization, IPM motor control is selected and the parameters, which are
required to drive an IPM motor, are changed. Initial settings and setting ranges of the parameters are adjusted
automatically to drive an IPM motor.
· Initialization is performed by setting Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization or by choosing the mode on the operation
panel.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
value
Setting
range
0
1
998 *
IPM parameter
initialization
12
0
101
112
22, 32,
122, 132
*
Description
Parameter settings for a generalpurpose motor (frequency)
Initial parameter settings
required to drive a
general-purpose motor
are set.
Parameter settings for a
high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF
(rotations per minute)
Parameter settings for a premium
high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS
and MM-THE4 (rotations per minute)
Parameter settings for a
high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF
(frequency)
Parameter settings for a premium
high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS
and MM-THE4 (frequency)
Initial parameter settings
required to drive an IPM
motor are set.
For manufacturer setting. (Do not set.)
This parameter allows its setting to be changed in any operation mode even if "0 (initial value)" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
(1) IPM parameter initialization (Pr.998)
· To use a 0.4kW MM-EF, set Pr. 80 Motor capacity = "0.4" before performing IPM parameter initialization. By
performing IPM parameter initialization, initial settings required to drive an IPM motor can be set in parameters.
· When Pr. 998 = "1 or 12," the monitor is displayed and the frequency is set using the motor rotations per minute.
To use frequency to display or set, set Pr. 998 = "101 or 112."
· Set Pr. 998 = "0" to change the parameter settings from the settings required to drive an IPM motor to the settings
required to drive a general-purpose motor.
Pr.998 Setting
0 (initial value)
1
12
101
112
Description
Operation after selecting the
parameter setting mode on the
operation panel
Parameter settings for a general-purpose motor (frequency)
Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF
(rotations per minute)
Parameter settings for a premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS
and MM-THE4 (rotations per minute)
Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF (frequency)
Parameter settings for a premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS
and MM-THE4 (frequency)
(IPM)  Write "0"
(IPM)  Write "1"
(IPM)  Write "12"
Invalid
Invalid
REMARKS
· Make sure to set Pr. 998 before setting other parameters. If the Pr. 998 setting is changed after setting other parameters, some
of those parameters will be initialized too. (Refer to "(2) IPM parameter initialization list" for the parameters that are initialized.)
· To change back to the parameter settings required to drive a general-purpose motor, perform parameter clear or all parameter
clear.
· If the setting of Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization is changed from "1, 12 (rotations per minute)" to "101, 112 (frequency)," or
from "101, 112" to "1, 12," all the target parameters are initialized.
The purpose of Pr. 998 is not to change the display units. Use Pr. 144 Speed setting switchover to change the display units between
rotations per minute and frequency. Pr. 144 enables switching of display units between rotations per minute and frequency
without initializing the parameter settings.
Example) Changing the Pr. 144 setting between "6" and "106" switches the display units between frequency and rotations per
minute.
42
Initializing the parameters required to drive
an IPM motor (Pr.998) <IPM>
(2) IPM parameter initialization list
By selecting IPM motor control from the parameter setting mode or with Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization, the
parameter settings in the following table change to the settings required to drive an IPM motor. The changed settings
differ according to the IPM motor specification (capacity). Refer to the IPM motor specification list shown below.
Performing parameter clear or all parameter clear sets back the parameter settings to the settings required to drive a
general-purpose motor.
Setting
Pr.998
1
Maximum frequency
4
Multi-speed setting (high speed)
9
Electronic thermal O/L relay
Rated inverter
current
Rated motor current
0
0
Jog frequency
18
High speed maximum frequency 120/60Hz *3
20
Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency
Stall prevention operation level
Frequency monitoring reference
Maximum motor rotations
Maximum motor frequency
per minute
Rated motor rotations per
Rated motor frequency
minute
120%
15
Speed display
101 (MM-EF),
112 (MM-EFS,
MM-THE4)
1 (MM-EF),
12 (MM-EFS,
MM-THE4)
Minimum rotations per
Minimum frequency
minute
Minimum rotations per
Minimum frequency
minute
Maximum motor rotations
Maximum motor frequency
per minute
Rated motor rotations per
Rated motor frequency
minute
Short-time motor torque
Starting frequency
55
0.5Hz
5Hz
60Hz
60Hz
Rated inverter
current
Rated motor rotations per
minute
Setting
increments
1, 12
0, 101,
112
1r/min
0.01Hz
1r/min
0.01Hz
0.01A/0.1A *3
1r/min
0.01Hz
1r/min
0.01Hz
1r/min
0.01Hz
1r/min
0.01Hz
0.1%
1
Rated motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
56
Current monitoring reference
71
Applied motor
0
80
125
(903)
126
(905)
Motor capacity
9999
Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain frequency
60Hz
Rated motor rotations per
minute
Rated motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain frequency
60Hz
Rated motor rotations per
minute
Rated motor frequency
1r/min
0.01Hz
Number of motor poles +
100
Number of motor poles
Rated motor current
120 (when Pr.998 = "1 or 101")
210 (when Pr.998 = "12 or 112")
Inverter capacity *2
0.01A/0.1A *3
1
0.01kW/0.1kW *3
144
Speed setting switchover
4
240
1
0
1
260
Soft-PWM operation selection
PWM frequency automatic
switchover
1
1
1
263
Subtraction starting frequency
60Hz
266
Power failure deceleration time
switchover frequency
60Hz
374
Overspeed detection level
9999
390 *1
505
557
% setting reference frequency
60Hz
Speed setting reference
Current average value monitor
signal output reference current
60Hz
Rated inverter
current
870
Speed detection hysteresis
885
Regeneration avoidance
6Hz
compensation frequency limit value
Rated inverter
Energy saving monitor
reference (motor capacity)
capacity
893
*3
60Hz
13
22
37
*1
*2
120/60Hz *3
IPM motor (rotations
IPM motor (frequency)
per minute)
0Hz
Rated motor rotations per
Rated motor frequency
minute
Rated motor rotations per
Rated motor frequency
minute
Maximum motor rotations Maximum motor frequency
per minute  105%
 105%
Rated motor frequency
1
1r/min
0.01Hz
1r/min
0.01Hz
1r/min
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
Rated motor frequency
0.01Hz
Rated motor current
0.01A/0.1A *3
Speed detection hysteresis Speed detection hysteresis
rotations per minute
frequency
Minimum rotations per
Minimum frequency
minute
Motor capacity (Pr. 80)
1r/min
0.01Hz
1r/min
0.01Hz
0.01kW/0.1kW *3
This parameter can be set when FR-A7NL is mounted.
When Pr.80 Motor capacity  "9999," the Pr.80 Motor capacity setting is not changed by IPM parameter initialization. IPM parameter initialization is
performed by setting Pr.998 IPM parameter initialization or the parameter setting mode on the operation panel.
Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
REMARKS
If IPM parameter initialization is performed in rotations per minute (Pr.998 = "1" or "12"), the frequency-related parameters not
listed in the table and the monitored items are also set and displayed in rotations per minute.
43
3
DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM>
Name
Parameter
Generalpurpose
motor
0
(Initial
setting)
Initializing the parameters required to drive
an IPM motor (Pr.998) <IPM>
[IPM motor specification list]
Rated motor frequency
(rotations per minute)
Maximum motor frequency
(rotations per minute)
Number of motor poles
Short-time motor torque
Minimum frequency
(rotations per minute)
Speed detection hysteresis
frequency (rotations per
minute)
44
MM-EF
(30kW or
lower)
MM-EF
(37kW to
75kW)
MM-EF
(90kW or
higher)
MM-EFS
(15kW or
lower)
MM-EFS
(18.5kW to
55kW)
MM-THE4
(75kW to
160kW)
90Hz
(1800r/min)
135Hz
(2700r/min)
6
120%
9Hz
(180r/min)
120Hz
(1800r/min)
180Hz
(2700r/min)
8
120%
12Hz
(180r/min)
120Hz
(1800r/min)
160Hz
(2400r/min)
8
120%
12Hz
(180r/min)
75Hz
(1500r/min)
112.5Hz
(2250r/min)
6
120%
7.5Hz
(150r/min)
100Hz
(1500r/min)
150Hz
(2250r/min)
8
120%
10Hz
(150r/min)
75Hz
(1500r/min)
90Hz
(1800r/min)
6
120%
7.5Hz
(150r/min)
0.5Hz
(10r/min)
0.5Hz
(8r/min)
0.5Hz
(8r/min)
0.5Hz
(10r/min)
0.5Hz
(8r/min)
0.5Hz
(10r/min)
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4 DRIVING THE MOTOR
4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.1
Component of the operation panel (FR-DU07)
To mount the operation panel (FR-DU07) on the enclosure surface, refer to page 25.
(a) Unit indicator
(g) Monitor indicator
(b) Monitor (4-digit LED)
(h) IPM motor control indicator
(c) Setting dial
(i) Operation mode indicator
(d) PU/EXT key
(j) Rotation direction indicator
(e) MODE key
(k) FWD key, REV key
(f) SET key
(l) STOP/RESET key
Component
Name
Description
(a)
Unit indicator
Hz: Lit to indicate frequency. (Flickers when the set frequency monitor is displayed.)
A: Lit to indicate current.
V: Lit to indicate voltage.
(b)
Monitor (4-digit LED)
Shows the frequency, parameter number, etc.
(To monitor the output power, set frequency and other items, set Pr.52.)
(c)
Setting dial
(d)
PU/EXT key
The dial of the Mitsubishi inverters. The setting dial is used to change the frequency and
parameter settings.
Press the setting dial to perform the following operations:
 To display a set frequency in the monitor mode
 To display the present setting during calibration
 To display a fault history number in the faults history mode
Used to switch between the PU and External operation modes.
To use the External operation mode (operation using a separately connected frequency setting
potentiometer and start signal), press this key to light up the EXT indicator.
(Press
simultaneously (0.5s), or change the Pr.79 setting to change to the combined
operation mode. )
PU: PU operation mode
EXT: External operation mode
Used to cancel the PU stop also.
Used to switch among different setting modes.
(e)
MODE key
Pressing
4
simultaneously changes the operation mode.
Holding this key for 2 seconds locks the operation. The key lock is invalid when Pr.161 = "0
(initial setting)." (Refer to page 103.)
Used to enter a setting.
Output frequency  Output current  Output voltage*
If pressed during the
operation, monitored item
* Energy saving monitor is displayed when the
changes as the following:
energy saving monitor is set with Pr. 52.
(f)
SET key
(g)
Monitor indicator
Lit to indicate the monitor mode.
(h)
IPM motor control
indicator
Lit to indicate IPM motor control.
Flickers to indicate IPM motor test operation.
(i)
Operation mode
indicator
(j)
Rotation direction
indicator
(k)
FWD key, REV key
FWD key: Used to give a start command in forward rotation.
REV key: Used to give a start command in reverse rotation.
(l)
STOP/RESET key
Used to stop operation commands.
Used to reset a fault when the protective function (fault) is activated.
PU: Lit to indicate the PU operation mode.
EXT: Lit to indicate the External operation mode. (EXT is lit at power-ON in the initial setting.)
NET: Lit to indicate the Network operation mode.
PU and EXT: Lit to indicate EXT/PU combined operation mode 1 and 2
FWD: Lit to indicate the forward rotation.
REV: Lit to indicate the reverse rotation.
Lit: When the forward/reverse operation is being performed.
Flickers: When the frequency command is not given even if the forward/reverse command is given.
When the frequency command is lower than the starting frequency.
When the MRS signal is being input.
45
DRIVING THE MOTOR
No.
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.2
Basic operation (factory setting)
Operation mode switchover
At power-ON (External operation mode)
Parameter setting
Monitor/frequency setting
PU Jog operation mode
(Example)
PU operation mode
(output frequency monitor)
Value change
and frequency flicker.
Frequency setting has been
written and completed!!
(Refer to page 50)
Output current monitor
Output voltage monitor
Displays the present
setting
Parameter setting mode
(Example)
Value change
Parameter and a setting value
flicker alternately.
Parameter write is completed!!
Parameter clear
All parameter
clear
Initial value change list
Fault clear
Parameter copy
Automatic parameter
setting
IPM parameter
initialization
Faults history
[Operation for displaying faults history]
The past eight faults can be displayed. (Refer to page 131)
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault history exists,
is displayed.
While a fault is displayed:
The display shifts as follows by pressing
Output current
Output voltage
: Output frequency at the fault
Energization time.
(After Energization time, it goes back to a fault display.)
the setting dial shows the fault history number.
Pressing
46
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.3
Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)
Setting of Pr. 79 Operation mode selection according to combination of the start command and speed command can be
easily made.
Operation example
.
Start command by the external signal (STF/STR), frequency command by
Operation
Display
1. Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
2. Press
and
3. Turn
until
for 0.5s.
appears.
(Refer to the table below for other settings)
Operation Panel Indication
Flickering
Operation Method
Start command
Frequency command
*
,
Flickering
External
Analog
(STF, STR)
voltage input
Flickering
External
*
(STF, STR)
Flickering
Analog
,
voltage input
Flickering
* To use
4. Press
as a potentiometer, refer to page 55.
4
to set.
DRIVING THE MOTOR
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
The monitor display appears after 3s.
REMARKS
is displayed ... Why?
Pr. 79 is not registered in user group with "1" in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
is displayed ... Why?
Setting cannot be changed during operation. Turn the start command (
 If
is pressed before pressing
or
, STF or STR) OFF.
, the easy setting mode is terminated and the display goes back to the monitor display. If the
easy setting mode is terminated while Pr.79 = "0 (initial setting)," the operation mode switches between the PU operation mode and the
External operation mode. Check the operation mode.
 Reset can be made with
.
 The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal
4 analog input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".
47
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.4
Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s))
Operation using the setting dial and key of the operation panel can be invalid to prevent parameter change, and
unexpected start or frequency setting.
· Set "10 or 11" in Pr. 161, then press
for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid.
· When the setting dial and key operation are invalid,
appears on the operation panel.
If dial and key operation is attempted while dial and key operation are invalid,
is not touched for 2s, the monitor display appears.)
· To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press
appears. (When dial or key
for 2s.
POINT
Set "10 or 11" (key lock valid) in Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Operation
Display
1.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
PU indicator is lit.
2.Press
to choose the PU
operation mode.
The parameter
number read
previously
appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
5.Press
"
until
(Pr. 160) appears.
to read the currently set value.
"(initial value) appears.
6.Turn
to change
it to the setting value of "
7.Press
".
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
8.Change Pr. 161 to the setting value of "
in the similar manner.
(Refer to step 4 to 7.)
9.Press
"
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
for 2s to show the key lock.
Press for 2s.
Functions valid even in the operation lock status
Stop and reset with
.
CAUTION
Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
48
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.5
Monitoring of output current and output voltage
POINT
Monitor display of output frequency, output current and output voltage can be changed by pushing
during
monitoring mode.
Operation
Display
1.Press
during operation to choose the output
frequency monitor
2.Independently of whether the inverter is running
in any operation mode or at a stop, the output
current monitor appears by pressing
3.Press
.
to show the output voltage monitor.
REMARKS
 Monitored item can be changed from output voltage to other items such as output power and set frequency by setting Pr.52.
Refer to Chapter 4 of
4.1.6
the Instruction Manual (Applied).
First priority monitor
Hold down
for 1s to set monitor description to be appeared first in the monitor mode.
(To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down
4.1.7
for 1s after displaying the output frequency monitor.)
Displaying the set frequency
Press the setting dial (
) in the PU operation mode or in the External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr. 79 =
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR
"3") to show the set frequency.
49
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.8
Changing the parameter setting value
Changing example
Change the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency .
Operation
Display
1.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indicator is lit.
to choose the PU operation
mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.
Pr. 1) appears.
5.Press
"
6.Turn
value "
7.Press
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
to change it to the set
".
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
to
· Turn
to read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
· Press
twice to return the monitor to frequency monitor.
appear ... Why?
appears. ......Write disable error
appears. ......Write error during operation
appears. ......Calibration error
appears. ......Mode designation error
For details refer to page 117.
REMARKS
 The number of digits displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) is four. Only the upper four digits of values can be displayed
and set. If the values to be displayed have five digits or more including decimal places, the fifth or later numerals cannot be
displayed nor set.
(Example) When Pr.1
When 60Hz is set, 60.00 is displayed.
When 120Hz is set, 120.0 is displayed. The second decimal places cannot be displayed nor set.
POINT
When Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "0 (initial setting)," the parameter setting change is only available while the
inverter is stopped under the PU operation mode.
To enable the parameter setting change while the inverter is running or under the operation mode other than PU
operation mode, change the Pr.77 setting.
50
Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)
4.2 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)
Set the rated motor current in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay to protect the motor from overheat.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial Value
9
Electronic thermal O/L relay
Rated inverter
current *1 *3
*1
*2
*3
Setting Range *2
55K or lower
75K or higher
Description
0 to 500A
0 to 3600A
Set the rated motor current.
Refer to page 149 for the rated inverter current value.
The minimum setting increments are 0.01A for the 55K or lower and 0.1A for the 75K or higher.
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Changing example
Change the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting to 2.0A according to the rated motor current.
(FR-F740P-0.75K)
Operation
Display
1.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indicator is lit.
to choose the PU
operation mode.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
until "
"(Pr. 9
Electronic thermal O/L relay) appears.
Refer to page
149 for initial
value of the
rated inverter
current.
5.Press
to show the present
set value. (2.1A for FR-740P-0.75K)
6.Turn
to change
the set value to "
7.Press
". (2.0A)
to set.
Flicker
· By turning
··· Parameter
setting complete!!
4
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
CAUTION
· Internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input.
Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
· When using multiple motors with one inverter, or using a multi-pole motor or a specialized motor, provide an external thermal
relay (OCR) between the inverter and motor. And for the setting of the thermal relay, add the line-to line leakage current (refer
to Chapter 3 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied)) to the current value on the motor rating plate. For low-speed operation
where the cooling capability of the motor reduces, it is recommended to use a thermal protector or thermistor-incorporated
motor.
· When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
· PTC thermistor output built-in the motor can be input to the PTC signal (AU terminal). For details, refer to Chapter 4 of
Instruction Manual (Applied).
the
51
DRIVING THE MOTOR
4.Turn
The parameter number
read previously appears.
When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz
(Pr. 3)<V/F><S MFVC>
4.3 When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3)
V/F
S MFVC
<V/F><S MFVC>
First, check the motor rating plate. If a frequency given on the rating plate is "50Hz" only, always set Pr. 3 Base frequency
to "50Hz". If it remains at "60Hz", the voltage may become too low and torque shortage occurs, resulting in an overload
trip. It may result in an inverter trip (E.OC) due to overload.
Parameter
Number
3
Name
Initial Value
Setting Range
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
Base frequency
Description
Set the frequency when the rated
motor torque is generated.
Changing example Change Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz according to the rated motor frequency.
Operation
Display
1.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indicator is lit.
to choose the PU operation
mode.
The parameter
number
read previously
appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
until Pr. 3 Base frequency
appears.
5.Press
to show the present set
value. (60Hz)
6.Turn
value to "
7.Press
to change the set
". (50Hz)
to set.
Flicker
· By turning
52
··· Parameter
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
setting complete!!
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
4.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)
POINT
From where is the frequency command given?
·
·
·
·
·
Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the operation panelRefer to 4.4.1 (Refer to page 53)
Operation using the setting dial as the potentiometerRefer to 4.4.2 (Refer to page 55)
Change of frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to terminalsRefer to 4.4.3 (Refer to page 56)
Frequency setting using voltage input signalRefer to 4.4.4 (Refer to page 58)
Frequency setting using current input signalRefer to 4.4.5 (Refer to page 59)
4.4.1
Setting the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz)
POINT
Use the operation panel (FR-DU07) to give both of frequency and start commands in PU operation.
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
Operation example
Performing operation at 30Hz.
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON
Display
The monitor display appears.
2. Operation mode setting
Press
PU indicator is lit.
PU
to choose the PU operation mode.
EXT
NET
3. Running frequency setting
Turn
to show the frequency "
" (30.00Hz) you
Flickers for about 5s
want to set.
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
While the value is flickering, press
(If you do not press
to set the frequency.
, the value flickers for about 5s and the
display then returns to "
Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!
After 3s, the monitor display appears.
" (0.00Hz). At this time, return to
about 3s, the display returns to "
DRIVING THE MOTOR
"Step 3" and set the frequency again. After the value flickered for
" (monitor display).
4. Start acceleration  constant speed
Press
or
to start running.
/
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr. 7 Acceleration
time, and "
" (30.00Hz) appears.
To change the set frequency, perform the operation in above step 3. (Starting from the previously set frequency.)
5. Deceleration  Stop
Press
to stop.
Stop
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8 Deceleration
time, and the motor stops rotating with "
4
" (0.00Hz)
displayed.
53
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
Operation cannot be performed at the set frequency ... Why?
Did you carry out step 4 within 5s after step 3? (Did you press
within 5s after turning
?)
The frequency does not change by turning
... Why?
Check to see if the operation mode selected is the External operation mode. (Press
to change to
the PU operation mode.)
Operation does not change to the PU operation mode ... Why?
Check that "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
Check that the start command is not on.
Change acceleration time
Pr. 7 (Refer to page 74)
Change deceleration time
Pr. 8 (Refer to page 74)
For example, limit the motor speed to 60Hz maximum.
Set "60Hz" in Pr. 1. (Refer to page 73)
REMARKS
· Press
·
54
to show the set frequency.
can also be used like a potentiometer to perform operation. (Refer to page 55)
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
4.4.2
Using the setting dial like a potentiometer at the operation
POINT
Set "0" (extended mode parameter valid) in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
Set "1" (setting dial potentiometer mode) in Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Operation example Change the frequency from 0Hz to 60Hz during operation
Operation
Display
1. Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
2. Operation mode setting
Press
mode.
3. Press
to choose the PU operation
to choose the parameter setting
mode.
4. Turn
5. Press
"
PU indicator is lit.
until
The parameter number
read previously appears.
(Pr. 160) appears.
to read the present set value.
" (initial value) appears.
6. Turn
to change it to
the setting value of " ".
7. Press
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
8. Change Pr. 161 to the setting value of "
"
in the similar manner. (Refer to step 4 to 7.)
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
9. Mode/monitor check
Press
twice to choose
monitor/frequency monitor.
4
10. Start
(or
) to start the inverter.
DRIVING THE MOTOR
Press
11. Turn
until "
" appears.
The flickering frequency is the set frequency.
You need not press
.
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
REMARKS
· If flickering "60.00" turns to "0.0", the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection setting may not be "1".
· Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by simply turning
.
CAUTION
· When using the setting dial, the frequency goes up to the set value of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency (In the initial setting, it is 120Hz
(55K or lower) or 60Hz (75K or higher) under general-purpose motor control, and it is the maximum motor speed (frequency)
under IPM motor control.)
Adjust Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting according to the application.
55
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
4.4.3
Setting the frequency by switches (multi-speed setting for 3 speeds)
POINT
· Use
or
on the operation panel (FR-DU07) to give a start command.
[Connection diagram]
Inverter
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
RH
RM
RL
SD
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
Output frequency (Hz)
· Switch ON the RH, RM, or RL signal to give a frequency command. (Three-speed setting)
· Set "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
RH
RM
RL
Operation example
Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2
(Middle speed)
Speed 3
(Low speed)
Time
ON
ON
ON
Operate in low-speed (10Hz)
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON.
Display
The monitor display appears.
2. Operation mode setting
Set "4" in Pr.79.
[PU] indicator and [EXT] indicator are lit.
(To change the set value, refer to page 47)
3. Start
Turn ON the low-speed switch (RL).
High
speed
Middle
speed
Low
speed
ON
4. Acceleration  constant speed
Press
or
to start.
/
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr. 7 Acceleration
time, and "
" (10.00Hz) appears.
5. Deceleration
Press
to stop.
Stop
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8 Deceleration
time, and the motor stops rotating with "
" (0.00Hz)
displayed.
6. Stop
Turn OFF the low-speed switch (RL).
High
speed
Middle
speed
56
Low
speed
OFF
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
60Hz for the RH, 30Hz for the RM and 10Hz for the RL are not output when they are turned ON ... Why?
Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again.
(Refer to page 73.)
Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1", Pr.
182 RH terminal function selection = "2", and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial values)
[FWD (or REV)] lamp is not lit ... Why?
Check that wiring is correct. Check the wiring once again.
Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "4".)
(Refer to page 77.)
Change the frequency of the terminal RL, RM, and RH. ... How?
Refer to page 64 to change the running frequency at each terminal in Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high
speed), Pr. 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed), and Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed).
REMARKS
· Initial value of terminal RH, RM, and RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (To change, set Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6.)
· In the initial setting, when two or more of multi-speed settings are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the set frequency
of the lower signal. For example, when RH and RM signals turn ON, RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority.
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR
· Maximum of 15-speed operation can be performed. (Refer to Chapter 4 of
57
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
4.4.4
Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input)
POINT
· Use
or
on the operation panel (FR-DU07) to give a start command.
· Use the potentiometer (by connecting terminal 2 and 5) to give a frequency command.
· Set "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
[Connection diagram]
(The inverter supplies 5V of power to the frequency setting potentiometer.(Terminal 10))
Inverter
Frequency setting
potentiometer
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
10
2
5
Operation example Performing operation at 60Hz.
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON
Display
The monitor display appears.
2. Operation mode setting
Set "4" in Pr.79.
[PU] indicator and [EXT] indicator are lit.
(To change the set value, refer to page 47)
3. Start
Press
or
.
/
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency
Flickering
command is given.
4. Acceleration  constant speed
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the display increases according to Pr. 7
Acceleration time until "
"(60Hz) is displayed.
5. Deceleration
Stop
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer) counterclockwise slowly to full. The frequency on the display decreases
in the Pr. 8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops rotating with
"
Flickering
" (0.00Hz) displayed.
[FWD] indicator or [REV] indicator flickers.
6. Stop
Press
[FWD] indicator or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 5V)
Adjust the frequency in Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 67.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to
Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
58
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
4.4.5
Setting the frequency by analog input (current input)
POINT
· Use
or
on the operation panel (FR-DU07) to give a start command.
· Use the current signal source (4 to 20mA) (by connecting terminal 4 and 5) to give a frequency command.
· Switch ON the AU signal.
· Set "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
[Connection diagram]
Inverter
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
AU
AU signal
SD
Current signal
source
(4 to 20mADC)
4 (+)
5 (-)
Operation example Performing operation at 60Hz.
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON
Display
The monitor display appears.
2. Operation mode setting
Set "4" in Pr.79.
[PU] indicator and [EXT] indicator are lit.
(To change the set value, refer to page 47)
3. Start
Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal (AU) is ON.
/
Press
or
Flickering
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency command is given.
4. Acceleration  constant speed
Perform 20mA input.
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr. 7 Acceleration
" (60.00Hz) appears.
5. Deceleration
Input 4mA or less.
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8 Deceleration
time, and the motor stops rotating with "
Current signal
source
(4mADC)
" (0.00Hz)
Stop
Flickering
displayed. [FWD] indicator or [EXT] indicator flickers.
6. Stop
Press
[FWD] indicator or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
REMARKS
Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to Chapter 4 of
Manual (Applied).)
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR
time, and "
Current signal
source
(20mADC)
the Instruction
Change the frequency (60Hz) at the maximum current input (at 20mA, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 69.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) at the minimum current input (at 4mA, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to
Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
59
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
4.5 Start/stop using terminals (External operation)
POINT
From where is the frequency command given?
·
·
·
·
Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the operation panel Refer to 4.5.1(Refer to page 60)
Give a frequency command by switch (multi-speed setting) Refer to 4.5.3 (Refer to page 64)
Perform frequency setting using voltage input signal  Refer to 4.5.4 (Refer to page 66)
Perform frequency setting using current input signal  Refer to 4.5.6 (Refer to page 68)
4.5.1
Setting the frequency by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3)
POINT
· Switch ON the STF (STR) signal to give a start command.
· Use (
) on the operation panel (FR-DU07) to give a frequency command.
· Set "3" (External/PU combination operation mode 1) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
[Connection diagram]
Inverter
Forward rotation
start
Reverse rotation
start
STF
STR
SD
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
Operation example
Performing operation at 30Hz.
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON
Display
The monitor display appears.
2. Operation mode setting
Set "3" in Pr.79.
[PU] indicator and [EXT] indicator are lit.
(To change the set value, refer to page 47)
3. Running frequency setting
Turn
to show the selected frequency, "
"
Flickers for about 5s
(30.00Hz). The frequency flickers for about 5s.
4.
While the value is flickering, press
to set the
frequency.
(If you do not press
, the value flickers for about 5s
and the display then returns to "
" (display) Hz. At this
time, return to "Step 8" and set the frequency again.)
After about 3s of flickering of the value, the display goes
back to "
60
" (monitor display).
Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!
After 3s, the monitor display
appears.
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
Operation
5. Start acceleration constant speed
Display
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR).
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr.7
Acceleration time setting, and "
" (30.00Hz) appears.
[FWD] indicator is lit during forward rotation, and [REV]
indicator is lit during reverse rotation.
ON
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
CAUTION
When both of STF and STR signals are turned ON, the
motor cannot start. If both are turned ON while the motor
is running, the motor decelerates to a stop.
6.
To change the set frequency, perform the operation in above steps 3 and 4.
(Starting from the previously set frequency.)
7. Deceleration  Stop
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR).
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8
Deceleration time, and the motor stops rotating with "
Stop
"
(0.00Hz) displayed.
OFF
REMARKS
· Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
(All are initial values)
· When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection is set to "3", multi-speed operation (refer to page 64) is also valid.
When the inverter is stopped by
of the operation panel (FR-DU07),
displayed alternately.
1. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) OFF.
2. The display can be reset by
and
are
Flickering
.
When the setting dial is used as a potentiometer.
1. Set Pr.160 User group read selection = "0"(Extended mode parameters valid).
2. Set Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection = "1" (setting dial potentiometer). (Refer to
page 55.)
DRIVING THE MOTOR
4
61
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
4.5.2
Switching between the automatic operation and the manual operation
(operation by the multi-speed setting and the operation panel) (Pr.79=3)
POINT
· Use terminal STF (STR) to give a start command.
· Use terminal RH, RM, and RL to set a frequency (automatic operation) in the normal operation.
· Use the operation panel (FR-DU07) (
) to set a frequency manually (manual operation) during maintenance,
etc.
· Set "3" (External/PU combined operation mode 1) in Pr.79.
· The priority for the frequency setting is "multi-speed setting > operation panel."
Inverter
Forward rotation
start
Reverse rotation
start
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
STF
STR
RH
RM
RL
SD
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
Automatic operation
RH
RM
Manual operation
Operation example
Output frequency (Hz)
[Connection diagram]
RL
Speed 1
(High speed)
The frequency set
Speed 2
(Middle speed) by the operation panel
Speed 3
(Low speed)
ON
Time
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Operate at the high-speed (60Hz) (automatic operation) in the normal operation. Operate at 30Hz (manual
operation) using the operation panel for an adjustment.
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON
Display
The monitor display appears.
2. Operation mode setting
Set "3" in Pr.79.
[PU] indicator and [EXT] indicator are lit.
(To change the set value, refer to page 47.)
3. Frequency setting for the automatic
operation
Turn ON the high-speed switch (RH).
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
ON
4. Start acceleration constant speed
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR).
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr. 7
Acceleration time setting, and "
ON
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
" (60.00Hz)
appears.
[FWD] indicator is lit during the forward rotation and [REV]
indicator is lit during the reverse rotation.
 If RM has been turned ON, 30Hz is displayed. If RL has
been turned ON, 10Hz is displayed.
CAUTION
When both of STF and STR signals are turned ON, the motor
cannot start.
If both are turned ON while the motor is running, the motor
decelerates to a stop.
5. Deceleration stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR).
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8
Deceleration time setting, and the motor stops rotating with
"
" (0.00Hz) displayed.
[FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
62
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
Stop
OFF
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
Operation
6. Cancelling the automatic operation
Display
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
OFF
Turn OFF the high-speed switch (RH).
7. Frequency setting in the manual
operation
Turn
to show the selected frequency, "
Flickers for about 5s
"
(30.00Hz).The frequency flickers for about 5s.
While the value is flickering, press
to set the
frequency.
(If you do not press
Flicker···Frequency setting complete!!
After 3s, the monitor display
appears.
, the value flickers for about 5s
and the display then returns to "
" (0.00Hz in the
monitor display). In that case, turn
again and set the
frequency.)
The value flickers for about 3s and the display then returns
to "
" (monitor display).
8. Start acceleration constant speed
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR).
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr. 7
Acceleration time setting, and "
" (30.00Hz)
appears.
[FWD] indicator is lit during the forward rotation and [REV]
ON
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
indicator is lit during the reverse rotation.
To change the set frequency, perform the operation in
above "Step 7"(starting from the previously set frequency).
9. Deceleration stop
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR).
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8
Deceleration time setting, and the motor stops rotating with
" (0.00Hz) displayed.
OFF
4
REMARKS
· Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61"). (All are
initial values.)
· External analog current input (4 to 20mA) can be used to set a frequency instead of the three-speed setting. Turn ON the
terminal 4 input selection signal (AU) to use the analog current input.
When the inverter is stopped by
of the operation panel (FR-DU07),
are
Flickering
displayed alternately.
1.Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR).
2.The display can be reset by
.
63
DRIVING THE MOTOR
"
Stop
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
4.5.3
Setting the frequency by switches (multi-speed setting for 3 speeds) (Pr.4 to Pr.6)
POINT
· Switch ON the STF (STR) signal to give a start command.
· Switch ON the RH, RM, or RL signal to give a frequency command.
· [EXT] must be lit. (When [PU] is lit, switch it to [EXT] with
.)
· The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, and RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (Use Pr. 4, Pr. 5 and Pr. 6 to
change.)
· Operation at 7-speed can be performed by turning two (or three) terminals simultaneously. (Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Output frequency (Hz)
[Connection diagram]
Inverter
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
STF
STR
RH
RM
RL
SD
RH
Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2
(Middle speed)
Speed 3
(Low speed)
Time
ON
RM
RL
ON
ON
Changing example Operation at high speed (60Hz).
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON
Display
ON
The monitor display appears.
2. Start
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
ON
Turn ON the high-speed switch (RH).
3. Acceleration constant speed
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR). The frequency on the
display increases in the Pr. 7 Acceleration time, and "
"
ON
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
(60.00Hz) appears.
[FWD] indicator is lit during forward rotation, and [REV]
indicator is lit during reverse rotation.
When RM is turned ON, 30Hz is displayed. When RL is turned
ON, 10Hz is displayed.
CAUTION
When both of STF and STR signals are turned ON, the
motor cannot start.
If both are turned ON while the motor is running, the motor
decelerates to a stop.
4. Deceleration
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR).
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8 Deceleration
time, and the motor stops rotating with "
displayed.
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
" (0.00Hz)
Stop
OFF
[FWD] indicator or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
5. Stop
Turn OFF the high-speed switch (RH).
64
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
OFF
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
[EXT] is not lit even when
is pressed ... Why?
Switchover of the operation mode with
is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
60Hz, 30Hz and 10Hz are not output from RH, RM and RL respectively when they are turned ON. ... Why?
Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again. (Refer to
page 73)
Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "0" or "2".) (Refer to page 77)
Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1",
Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection = "2" and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial
values)
[FWD (or REV)] is not lit. ... Why?
Check that wiring is correct. Check it again.
Check that "60" is set in Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection (or "61" is set in Pr. 179 STR terminal
function selection)?
(all are initial values)
How is the frequency setting from 4 to 7 speed ?
In the initial setting, when two or more of multi-speed settings are simultaneously selected, priority is
given to the set frequency of the lower signal. For example, when RH and RM signals turn ON, the
RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority. By setting Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 (multi-speed setting), up to 7- speed
can be set by combinations of RH, RM, and RL signals. Refer to Chapter 4 of
Manual (Applied).
the Instruction
Perform multi-speed operation more than 8 speed. ... How?
Use the REX signal to perform the operation. Maximum of 15-speed operation can be performed.
Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).
REMARKS
· External operation is fixed by setting "2" (External operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection when you do not want to take
or when you want to use the current start command and frequency command. (Refer to page 77)
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR
time pressing
65
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
4.5.4
Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input)
POINT
· Switch ON the STF (STR) signal to give a start command.
· Use the potentiometer (by connecting terminal 2 and 5 (voltage input)) to give a frequency command.
[Connection diagram]
(The inverter supplies 5V of power to frequency setting potentiometer. (Terminal 10))
Inverter
STF
STR
SD
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
Frequency setting
potentiometer
10
2
5
Operation example Performing operation at 60Hz.
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON
Display
ON
The monitor display appears.
2. Start
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) ON.
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency command is given.
CAUTION
When both of STF and STR signals are turned ON, the
motor cannot start.
If both are turned ON while the motor is running, the motor
decelerates to a stop.
ON
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
Flickering
3. Acceleration constant speed
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer)
clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr.7 Acceleration
time, and "
" (60.00Hz) appears. [FWD] indicator is lit
during forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is lit during reverse
rotation.
4. Deceleration
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting potentiometer)
counterclockwise slowly to full.
Flickering
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8 Deceleration
time, and the motor stops rotating with "
" (0.00Hz)
Stop
displayed. [FWD] indicator or [EXT] indicator flickers.
5. Stop
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) OFF.
[FWD] indicator or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
OFF
REMARKS
Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
(All are initial values.)
66
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
The motor will not rotate ... Why?
Check that [EXT] is lit.
[EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
Use
to lit [EXT].
Check that wiring is correct. Check once again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to
Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
When you want to compensate frequency setting, use terminal 1.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).
4.5.5
Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum voltage
input (5V, initial value)
<How to change the maximum frequency>
Changing example
When you use the 0 to 5VDC input to change frequency at 5V from 60Hz (initial value) to
50Hz, set "50Hz" in Pr. 125.
Operation
1.Turn
2.Press
"
3.Turn
to "
4.Press
until
Display
(Pr. 125) appears.
to show the present set value.
"(60.00Hz)
to change the set value
". (50.00Hz)
to set.
Flicker
5.Mode/monitor check
Press
··· 50Hz output at 5V input complete!!
twice to choose the monitor/frequency monitor.
6.To check the setting, turn the start switch (STF or STR) ON
and input 5V (turn the potentiometer clockwise slowly to full.)
(Refer to 4.5.4 steps 2 to 5)
the Instruction
How can I operate at a frequency higher than
120Hz.
Additionally set Pr.18 High speed maximum
frequency.
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
Manual (Applied).)
the Instruction
Gain Pr.125
Bias
C2
(Pr. 902)
0
0
Frequency setting signal
0
0
C3 (Pr. 902)
100%
5V
10V
20mA
C4 (Pr. 903)
REMARKS
As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied across
terminals 2 or 5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied.
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied) .)
67
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
Manual (Applied).)
Output frequency
(Hz)
The monitor on the operation panel or the frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM and SD does
not indicate exactly 50Hz.... Why?
The indicated value can be adjusted by the calibration parameter C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
The frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM and SD can be adjusted by the
calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration.
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Set frequency at 0V using calibration
Initial value
parameter C2.
60Hz
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
4.5.6
Setting the frequency by analog input (current input)
POINT
· Switch ON the STF (STR) signal to give a start command.
· Switch ON the AU signal.
· Set "2" (External operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
[Connection diagram]
Inverter
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
STF
STR
AU
SD
Current signal
source
(4 to 20mADC)
Operation example
4(+)
5(-)
Performing operation at 60Hz.
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON
Display
ON
The monitor display appears.
2. Start
Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal (AU) is ON.
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) ON.
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency
CAUTION
ON
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
When both of STF and STR signals are turned ON, the motor
cannot start.
If both are turned ON while the motor is running, the motor
decelerates to a stop.
Flickering
3. Acceleration constant speed
Perform 20mA input.
The frequency on the display increases in the Pr.7 Acceleration
time, and "
" (60.00Hz) appears.
Current signal
source
(20mADC)
[FWD] indicator is lit during forward rotation, and [REV] indicator
is lit during reverse rotation.
4. Deceleration
Input 4mA or less.
The frequency on the display decreases in the Pr. 8 Deceleration
time setting, and the motor stops rotating with "
Current signal
source
(4mADC)
" (0.00Hz)
displayed.
Flickering
Stop
[FWD] indicator or [EXT] indicator flickers.
5. Stop
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) OFF.
[FWD] indicator or [REV] indicator turns OFF.
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
OFF
REMARKS
Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to Chapter 4 of
(Applied).)
68
the Instruction Manual
Start/stop using terminals (External
operation)
The motor will not rotate ... Why?
Check that [EXT] is lit.
[EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
Use
PU
EXT
to lit [EXT].
Check that the AU signal is ON.
Turn the AU signal ON.
Check that wiring is correct. Check it again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4mA)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency.
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
4.5.7
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum current input
(at 20mA, initial value)
<How to change the maximum frequency>
Changing example
When you use the 4 to 20mA input and want to change the frequency at 20mA from 60Hz (initial
value) to 50Hz, set "50Hz" in Pr. 126.
Operation
1.Turn
until
2.Press
"
Display
(Pr. 126) appears.
to show the present set value.
"(60.00Hz)
3.Turn
to change the set value to "
".
(50.00Hz)
4.Press
to set the value.
Flicker
··· 50Hz output at 20mA input complete!!
5.Mode/monitor check
Press
twice to choose the
monitor/frequency monitor.
6.To check the setting, turn the start switch (STF or STR)
on and input 20mA. (Refer to 4.5.6 steps 2 to 5)
the Instruction
How can I operate at a frequency higher than
120Hz.
Additionally set Pr.18 High speed maximum
frequency.
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
Manual (Applied).)
the Instruction
Bias
C5
(Pr. 904)
Gain Pr. 126
20
0
4 Frequency setting signal
0
1
0
2
0
C6 (Pr. 904)
100%
20mA
5V
10V
C7 (Pr. 905)
REMARKS
As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied across
terminals 4 and 5 or adjust at any point without a voltage applied.
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied) for the setting method of calibration parameter C7.)
69
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
Manual (Applied).)
Output frequency
(Hz)
The frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM and SD does not indicate exactly 50Hz ... Why?
The indicated value can be adjusted by the calibration parameter C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
The frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM and SD can be adjusted by the
calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration.
(Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Set frequency at 4mA using calibration
Initial value
60Hz
parameter C5.
Simple mode parameter list
5 ADJUSTMENT
5.1 Simple mode parameter list
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set
the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can
be made from the operation panel (FR-DU07). For details of parameters, refer to Chapter 4 of
Manual (Applied).
the Instruction
POINT
Only simple mode parameters are displayed by the initial setting of Pr. 160 User group read selection. Set Pr. 160 User
group read selection as required. (Refer to page 50 for parameter change.)
Pr. 160
9999
(Initial Value)
0
1
Parameter
Number
0
V/F
Description
Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be displayed.
Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
Name
Torque boost
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
0.1%
6/4/3/2/
1.5/1%
Range
Applications
0 to 30%
Set to increase a starting torque or when the
motor with a load will not rotate, resulting in an
alarm [OL] and a trip [OC1]
0 to 120Hz
Set when the maximum output frequency need
to be limited.
*1
120/
60Hz *2,
Refer
to
72
1
Maximum
frequency
2
Minimum
frequency
0.01Hz
0Hz
0 to 120Hz
Set when the minimum output frequency need
to be limited.
Base frequency
0.01Hz
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set when the rated motor frequency is 50Hz.
Check the motor rating plate.
52
0.01Hz
60Hz *3
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
30Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set when changing the preset speed in the
parameter with a terminal.
64
0.01Hz
10Hz
0 to 400Hz
0.1s
5/15s *4
0 to 3600s
0.1s
10/30s *4
0 to 3600s
Acceleration/deceleration time can be set.
74
0.01/
0.1A *5
Rated
inverter
current
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A
Protect the motor from overheat by the inverter.
Set the rated motor current.
51
0.01Hz
*3
3
V/F
73
S MFVC
4
5
6
7
8
9
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
Acceleration time
Deceleration time
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
*5
*3
60
V/F
79
125
126
160
70
Energy saving
control selection
Operation mode
selection
Terminal 2
frequency setting
gain frequency
Terminal 4
frequency setting
gain frequency
User group read
selection
1
0
0, 4, 9
The inverter output voltage is minimized when
using for fan and pump applications.
75
1
0
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7
Select the start command location and
frequency setting location.
77
0.01Hz
60Hz *3
0 to 400Hz
Frequency for the maximum value of the
potentiometer (at 5V) can be changed.
67
0.01Hz
60Hz *3
0 to 400Hz
Frequency at 20mA input can be changed.
69
1
9999
0, 1, 9999
Make extended parameters valid
—
Parameter
Number
998
999
IPM parameter
initialization
Automatic
parameter setting
Incre
ments
1
1
Initial
Value
0
9999
Applications
Refer
to
0, 1, 12, 101,
112
By performing IPM parameter initialization, IPM
motor control is selected and the parameters,
which are required to drive an IPM motor, are
changed.
42
22, 32, 122,
132
For manufacturer setting. (Do not set.)
10, 11, 20, 21,
30, 31, 9999
Parameter settings are changed as a batch.
Those include communication parameter
settings for a Mitsubishi human machine
interface (GOT) connection, rated frequency
settings of 50Hz/60Hz, and acceleration/
deceleration time increment settings.
Range
114
Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (0.75K/1.5K to 3.7K/5.5K, 7.5K/11K to 37K/45K, 55K/75K or higher)
Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (7.5K or lower/11K or higher)
Setting increments and setting range differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
5
ADJUSTMENT
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Name
Simple mode parameter list
Simple mode parameter list
71
Increasing the starting torque (Pr. 0)
<V/F>
5.2 Increasing the starting torque (Pr. 0)
V/F
<V/F>
Set this parameter when "the motor with a load will not rotate", "an alarm [OL] is output, resulting in an inverter
trip due to [OC1], etc.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial Value
0.75K
1.5K to 3.7K
0
5.5K, 7.5K
Torque boost
11K to 37K
45K, 55K
75K or higher
6%
4%
3%
2%
1.5%
1%
Changing example When the motor with a load will not rotate,
Setting
Range
Description
0 to 30%
Motor torque in the lowfrequency range can be
adjusted to the load to increase
the starting motor torque.
100%
increase the Pr. 0 value 1% by 1% unit by
looking at the motor movement. (The guideline
is for about 10% change at the greatest.)
Output
voltage
Pr.0
Pr.46
Setting
range
0
Operation
Output
frequency
(Hz)
Base
frequency
Display
1.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
PU indicator is lit.
2.Operation mode setting
Press
to choose the PU operation mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.
Pr. 0) appears.
5.Press
to read the present set value.
"
"(initial value is 6% for the 0.75K)
appears.
6.Turn
"
The initial value
differs according
to the capacity.
to change it to the set value
".
7.Press
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· By turning
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
REMARKS
· Setting Pr.0 too high may cause the motor to overheat, resulting in an overcurrent trip (OL (overcurrent alarm) then E.OC1
(Overcurrent trip during acceleration)), thermal trip (E.THM (Motor overload trip), and E.THT (Inverter overload trip)).
When a fault (E.OC1) occurs, release the start command, and decrease the Pr. 0 value 1% by 1% to reset. (Refer to page 121.)
POINT
If the inverter still does not operate properly after taking the above measures, set Pr. 80 Motor capacity and select the
Simple magnetic flux vector control [extended mode]. (Refer to Chapter 4 of
72
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Limiting the maximum and minimum
output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
5.3
Limiting the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
Parameter
Number
Name
Setting
Range
Initial Value
1
Maximum frequency
55K or lower
75K or higher
2
Minimum frequency
0Hz
120Hz*
60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Description
Set the upper limit of the output
frequency.
0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Changing
example
Limit the frequency set by the potentiometer, etc. to
60Hz maximum.
(Set "60"Hz in Pr. 1 Maximum frequency.)
Output frequency
(Hz)
Clamped at the
maximum frequency
Pr.1
Pr.18
Frequency setting
Pr.2
Clamped at the
minimum frequency
Operation
0
(4mA)
5, 10V
(20mA)
Display
1.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
PU indicator is lit.
2.Operation mode setting
Press
mode.
to choose the PU operation
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.
Pr. 1) appears.
5.Press
"
6.Turn
value "
7.Press
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
to change it to the set
".
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· By turning
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
5
CAUTION
If the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency value, note that the motor will run at the set frequency
according to the acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal ON, without entry of the command
frequency.
73
ADJUSTMENT
REMARKS
· The output frequency is clamped by the Pr. 2 setting even if the set frequency is lower than the Pr. 2 setting (The frequency will
not decrease to the Pr. 2 setting.)
Note that Pr. 15 Jog frequency has higher priority than the minimum frequency.
· When the Pr. 1 setting is changed, frequency higher than the Pr. 1 setting cannot be set by
.
· When performing a high speed operation at 120Hz or more, setting of Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency is necessary. Even if
a value higher than the maximum frequency (refer to page 44) is set in Pr.18 under IPM motor control, the high speed maximum
frequency is limited to the maximum motor frequency. (Refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Changing acceleration and deceleration time
(Pr. 7, Pr. 8)
5.4 Changing acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)
Set in Pr. 7 Acceleration time a larger value for a slower speed increase and a smaller value for a faster speed increase.
Set in Pr. 8 Deceleration time a larger value for a slower speed decrease and a smaller value for a faster speed decrease.
Parameter
Number
Name
7
Acceleration time
8
Deceleration time
Setting
Range
Initial Value
7.5K or lower
11K or higher
7.5K or lower
11K or higher
5s
15s
10s
30s
Description
0 to 3600/
360s *
Set the motor acceleration time.
0 to 3600/
360s *
Set the motor deceleration time.
* Depends on the Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. The initial value for the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and setting increments is
"0.1s".
Change the Pr. 7 Acceleration time setting from "5s"
to "10s".
Pr.20
(60Hz)
Running
frequency
Output
frequency (Hz)
Changing example
Time
Acceleration Pr.7
time
Operation
Deceleration Pr.8
time
Display
1.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
PU indicator is lit.
2.Operation mode setting
Press
mode.
to choose the PU operation
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.
Pr. 7) appears.
5.Press
"
The initial value
differs according
to the capacity.
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
6.Turn
value "
7.Press
to change it to the set
".
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· By turning
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
POINT
If torque is required in the low-speed range (less than 10% of the rated motor frequency (on page 43)) under IPM
motor control, set the Pr.791 Acceleration time in low-speed range and Pr.792 Deceleration time in low-speed range
settings higher than the Pr.7 and Pr.8 settings so that the mild acceleration/deceleration is performed only in the lowspeed range. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Applied) for Pr.791 and Pr.792)
74
Energy saving operation for fans and
pumps (Pr.14, Pr.60) <V/F>
5.5
Energy saving operation for fans and pumps (Pr.14, Pr.60)
V/F
<V/F>
Set the following functions to perform energy saving operation for fans and pumps.
5.5.1
Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)
V/F
Select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) that is suitable for the application and load
characteristics.
14
Name
Initial Value
Setting
Range
1
0
1
Load pattern selection
Description
For constant torque load
For variable-torque load
The above parameters can be set when Pr.160 User group read selection = "0." (Refer to page 70)
 Set Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "1 (for variable-torque load) (initial value)."
 When the output frequency is equal to or less than the base frequency, the output
voltage changes by its square in proportion to the output frequency.
Use this setting to drive a load whose load torque changes in proportion to the square
of the speed, such as a fan and a pump.
Pr.14 = 1
100%
Output voltage
Parameter
Number
Pr.3 Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
CAUTION
 Load pattern selection is available only under V/F control. Load pattern selection is not available under Simple magnetic flux vector
control and IPM motor control.
5.5.2
Energy saving control (Pr.60)
V/F
Without a detailed parameter setting, the inverter can automatically perform energy saving operation.
This operation is appropriate for fan and pump applications.
Use Optimum excitation control when connecting one motor to one inverter. Use Energy saving operation when
connecting several motors to one inverter.
Parameter
Number
60
Name
Initial
Value
Setting
Range
0
0
4
9
Energy saving control selection
Remarks
Normal operation
Energy saving operation
Optimum excitation control
(1) Energy saving operation (setting "4")
REMARKS
· For applications where a large load torque is applied to or machines repeat frequent acceleration/deceleration, an energy saving
effect is not expected.
(2) Optimum excitation control (setting "9")
· When "9" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter performs the Optimum excitation control.
· The Optimum excitation control is a control method which controls excitation current to improve the motor efficiency
to maximum and determines output voltage as an energy saving method.
REMARKS
· When the motor capacity is too small as compared to the inverter capacity or two or more motors are connected to one inverter,
the energy saving effect is not expected.
75
5
ADJUSTMENT
· When "4" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter performs the energy saving operation.
· In the energy saving operation, the inverter automatically controls the output voltage to minimize the inverter output
voltage during a constant operation.
Energy saving operation for fans and
pumps (Pr.14, Pr.60) <V/F>
CAUTION
· When the energy saving operation and Optimum excitation control are selected, deceleration time may be longer than the
setting value. Since overvoltage alarm tends to occur as compared to the constant-torque load characteristics, set a longer
deceleration time.
· The energy saving operation and Optimum excitation control are available only under V/F control.
Energy saving operation and Optimum excitation control are not available under Simple magnetic flux vector control and IPM
motor control. (For Simple magnetic flux vector control, refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
POINT
To check the energy saving effect, refer to Chapter 4 of
saving effect monitor.
the Instruction Manual (Applied) and check the energy
Changing example Set "9" (Optimum excitation control) in Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection.
Operation
Display
1.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
PU indicator is lit.
2.Operation mode setting
Press
mode.
to choose the PU operation
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
until
(Pr. 60)
appears.
5.Press
"
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
6.Turn
value "
7.Press
to change it to the set
".
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
8. Perform normal operation.
When you want to check the energy saving effect,
refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)
to check the energy saving effect monitor.
· By turning
76
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
Selection of the start command and
frequency command sources (Pr. 79)
5.6 Selection of the start command and frequency command
sources (Pr. 79)
Select the start command source and frequency command source.
POINT
Setting value "1" to "4" can be changed in the easy setting mode. (Refer to page 47)
Parameter Number
79
Pr.79
Setting
Name
Initial Value
Setting Range
0
0 to 4, 6, 7
Operation mode selection
LED Indication
: OFF
: ON
Description
Refer to
PU operation mode
External operation mode
External operation mode.)
At power ON, the inverter is in the External operation mode.
NET operation mode
Frequency command
PU operation mode
(fixed)
Setting by the operation
panel (FR-DU07) and PU
(FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
External operation
mode (fixed)
The operation can be
performed by
switching between
the External and NET
operation modes.
External signal input
(from terminal 2, 4, and
1, JOG, multi-speed
selection, etc.)
External signal input (from
terminal STF and STR)
External/PU
combined operation
mode 1
PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/
FR-PU07) setting or
external signal input
(multi-speed setting,
across terminals 4 and 5
(valid when AU signal
turns ON)). *1
External signal input (from
terminal STF and STR)
4
External/PU
combined operation
mode 2
External signal input
(Terminal 2, 4, 1, JOG,
multi-speed selection,
etc.)
6
Switchover mode
Switch among PU operation, External operating, and NET operation while
keeping the same operating status.
7
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)
X12 signal ON *2
Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation mode.
(output stop during external operation)
X12 signal OFF *2
Operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode.
2
3
*2
to switch between the PU and
Operation mode
1
*1
External/PU switchover mode (press
Start command
Input by
PU operation mode
and
on PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/
FR-PU07)
External operation mode
Input by
and
NET operation mode
External/PU combined
operation mode
Chapter 4 of
the Instruction
Manual
(Applied)
Chapter 4 of
the Instruction
Manual
(Applied)
Chapter 4 of
the Instruction
Manual
(Applied)
Chapter 4 of
the Instruction
Manual
(Applied)
Chapter 4 of
the Instruction
Manual
(Applied)
on
PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FRPU07)
PU operation mode
Chapter 4 of
the Instruction
Manual
(Applied)
External operation mode
NET operation mode
Chapter 4 of
the Instruction
Manual
(Applied)
The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal 4 analog
input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".
For the terminal used for the X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign
functions. For Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, refer to Chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (Applied).
When the X12 signal is not assigned, function of the MRS signal switches from MRS (output stop) to PU operation interlock signal.
REMARKS
If switching of the operation mode is invalid even though Pr.79 is set, refer to page 137.
77
5
ADJUSTMENT
0
Parameter clear, all parameter clear
5.7 Parameter clear, all parameter clear
POINT
· Set "1" in Pr. CL parameter clear, ALLC All parameter clear to initialize parameters. (Parameters are not cleared
when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.)
· Refer to the parameter list on page 86 for the parameters to be cleared with this operation.
Operation
Display
1.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
PU indicator is lit.
2.Operation mode setting
Press
mode.
to choose the PU operation
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
until "
", "
"
appears.
Parameter clear All parameter clear
5.Press
"
to read the currently set value.
"(initial value) appears.
6.Turn
to change it to
the setting value " ".
7.Press
Parameter clear All parameter clear
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· Turn
to read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
and
are displayed alternately ... Why?
The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1. Press
.
is lit and the monitor (4-digit LED) displays "0" (Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)).
2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.
REMARKS
· Stop the inverter first. Writing error occurs if parameter clear is attempted while the inverter is running.
78
Parameter copy and parameter verification
5.8 Parameter copy and parameter verification
PCPY Setting
Description
0
1
2
3
Cancel
Copy the source parameters to the operation panel.
Write the parameters copied to the operation panel into the destination inverter.
Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. (Refer to page 80.)
REMARKS
· When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-F700(P) series or parameter copy write is performed after parameter copy read is
stopped, "model error (
)" is displayed.
· Refer to the parameter list on page 86 and later for availability of parameter copy.
· When the power is turned OFF or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy write, perform write again or check
the values by parameter verification.
· Initial settings of certain parameters are different for different capacities, so some parameter settings may be automatically changed
when parameter copy is performed from a different-capacity inverter. After performing a parameter copy from a different-capacity
inverter, check the parameter settings. Especially under IPM motor control, check the Pr.80 Motor capacity setting before starting the
operation. (Refer to the parameter list (page 86) for the parameters with different initial settings for different capacities.)
· If parameters are copied from an older inverter to a newer inverter that has additional parameters, out-of-range setting values may be
written in some parameters. In that case, those parameters operate as they were set to initial values.
5.8.1
Parameter copy
Parameter settings can be copied to multiple inverters.
Display
Operation
1.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
2.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3.Turn
until
(parameter copy)
appears.
4.Press
"
to to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
5.Turn
to change it to
the setting value " ".
6.Press
The frequency flickers
for about 30s
to copy the source parameters
to the operation panel.
About 30s later
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!
7.Connect the operation panel to the
5
copy destination inverter.
turn
to change it to "
9.Press
ADJUSTMENT
8.After performing steps 2 to 5,
".
to write the parameters copied to
The frequency flickers
for about 30s
the operation panel to the destination inverter.
· Connect it during a stop.
10.When copy is completed,
"
" and "
" flicker.
11.After writing the parameter values to the copy
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!
destination inverter, always reset the inverter,
e.g. switch power OFF once, before starting operation.
79
Parameter copy and parameter verification
appears...Why?
Parameter read error. Perform operation from step 3 again.
appears...Why?
Parameter write error. Perform operation from step 8 again.
and
flicker alternately
Appears when parameters are copied between the inverter of 55K or lower and 75K or higher.
1. Set "0" in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
2. Set the following setting (initial value) in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
55K or lower
75K or higher
10
100
Pr. 989 Setting
3. Reset Pr. 9, Pr. 30, Pr. 51, Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 56, Pr. 57, Pr. 70, Pr. 72, Pr. 80, Pr. 90, Pr. 158, Pr. 190 to Pr. 196, Pr. 557,
Pr. 893.
5.8.2
Parameter verification
Whether same parameter values are set in other inverters or not can be checked.
Operation
Display
1.Move the operation panel to the
inverter to be verified.
2.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
3.Operation mode setting
Press
mode.
PU indicator is lit.
to choose the PU operation
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
4.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
5.Turn
until
(parameter copy)
appears.
6.Press
to read the present set
value.
" "(initial value) appears.
7.Turn
to change it to the set value
" "(parameter copy verification mode).
8.Press
to read the parameter setting
of the verified inverter to the operation panel.
The frequency flickers
for about 30s
· If different parameters exist, different
parameter numbers and
· Hold down
flicker.
Flickering
to verify.
9.If there is no difference,
and
flicker to complete verification.
Flicker ··· Parameter verification complete!!
flickers ... Why?
Set frequencies, etc. may be different. Check set frequencies.
80
Initial value change list
5.9 Initial value change list
Displays and sets the parameters changed from the initial value.
Operation
1. Screen at power-ON
Display
The monitor display appears.
2. Operation mode setting
Press
3. Press
PU indicator is lit.
PU
to choose the PU operation mode.
5. Pressing
NET
PRM indicator is lit.
to choose the parameter setting
mode.
4. Turn
EXT
(The parameter number read previously appears.)
until
SET
appears.
changes to the initial value
SET
change list screen.
6. Turning
displays the parameter number
changed.
 Press
SET
Turn
to read the present set value.
and press
SET
SET
to change the
SET
setting.
(Refer to step 6 and 7 on page 50.)
 Turn
to read another parameter.
 The display returns to
parameters are displayed.
7. Pressing
Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!
SET
in
after all
status returns to
SET
the parameter setting mode.
 Turning
 Pressing
sets other parameters.
SET
displays the change list again.
5
81
ADJUSTMENT
REMARKS
 Calibration parameters (C0 (Pr. 900) to C7 (Pr. 905), C42 (Pr. 934) to C45 (Pr. 935)) are not displayed even they are changed from
the initial settings.
 Only simple mode parameter is displayed when simple mode is set (Pr. 160 = 9999 (initial value)).
 Only user group is displayed when user group is set (Pr. 160 = "1").
 Pr. 160 is displayed independently of whether the setting value is changed or not.
Parameter list
5.10 Parameter list
5.10.1 List of parameters classified by the purpose
Set the parameters according to the operating conditions.
The following list indicates purpose of use and corresponding parameters.
Purpose of Use
Function (Parameter Number)
Page
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment
— Acceleration/deceleration patterns and backlash measures (Pr.29, Pr.140 to
Pr.143)
90
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment
— Acceleration/deceleration time setting (Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.20, Pr.21, Pr.44, Pr.45,
87
Pr.147, Pr.791, Pr.792)
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment
— Regenerative avoidance operation (Pr.665, Pr.882 to Pr.886)
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment
— Starting frequency (Pr.13, Pr.571)
88
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor
— Manual torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46)
86
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor
— Simple magnetic flux vector control (Pr.90)
97
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor
— Simple magnetic flux vector control and IPM motor control (Pr.80)
97
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor
— Slip compensation (Pr.245 to Pr.247)
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor
— Stall prevention (Pr.22, Pr.23, Pr.48, Pr.49, Pr.66, Pr.148, Pr.149, Pr.154,
Pr.156, Pr.157)
89
Communication operation and command source
— Selection of the NET operation mode command source (Pr.550)
107
Communication operation and command source
— Selection of the PU operation mode command source (Pr.551)
107
Communication operation and setting
— Control of parameter write by communication (Pr.342)
107
Communication operation and setting
— Control of parameter write by communication (Pr.342)
98
Communication operation and setting
— Initial setting of RS-485 communication
(Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.551)
98
111
105
Communication operation and setting
— Initial setting of RS-485 communication (Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343,
Pr.502, Pr.539, Pr.549 to Pr.551, Pr.779)
107
Detection of output frequency and current
— Detection of output current (Y12 signal) and zero current (Y13 signal) (Pr.150
102
to Pr.153, Pr.166, Pr.167)
Detection of output frequency and current
— Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, and FU2 signals) (Pr.41 to Pr.43,
91
Pr.50, Pr.870)
Energy saving operation
— Energy saving control selection (Pr.60)
Frequency setting by analog input
— Analog input selection, override function, analog input compensation (Pr.73,
Pr.242, Pr.243, Pr.252, Pr.253, Pr.267)
95
Frequency setting by analog input
— Bias and gain for the frequency setting voltage (current) (Pr.125, Pr.126,
Pr.241, C2(Pr.902) to C7(Pr.905))
99
Frequency setting by analog input
— Noise elimination at the analog input (Pr.74)
96
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input)
— Compensation of multi speed and remote setting inputs (Pr.28)
89
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input)
— Jog operation (Pr.15, Pr.16)
88
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input)
— Multi-speed setting operation
(Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239)
86
82
94
Parameter list
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input)
— Remote setting function (Pr.59)
Function assignment of external terminal and control
— Condition selection for the
second functions activation (RT signal) (Pr.155)
102
Function assignment of external terminal and control
— Function assignment of input terminals (Pr.178 to Pr.189)
103
Function assignment of external terminal and control
— Function assignment of output terminals (Pr.190 to Pr.196)
104
Function assignment of external terminal and control
— Logic selection of the output stop signal (MRS) (Pr.17)
88
Function assignment of external terminal and control
— Pulse train output of output power (Y79 signal) (Pr.799)
110
Function assignment of external terminal and control
— Remote output function (REM signal) (Pr.495 to Pr.497)
109
Function assignment of external terminal and control
— Start signal selection (Pr.250)
105
IPM motor control
— Control method selection (Pr.800)
110
IPM motor control
— IPM parameter initialization (Pr.998)
114
IPM motor control
— Proportional gain setting for speed loops (Pr.820, Pr.821)
110
Limiting the output frequency
— Avoiding the mechanic resonance points
(frequency jump) (Pr.31 to Pr.36, Pr.552)
91
Limiting the output frequency
— Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr.1, Pr.2, Pr.18)
86
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
— Displaying necessary
parameters only (user group) (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174)
102
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
— Password function (Pr.296, Pr.297)
107
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
— Prevention of parameter rewrite (Pr.77)
96
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
— Reset selection and disconnected PU detection (Pr.75)
96
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
— Reverse motor rotation prevention (Pr.78)
96
Monitor display and monitor output signal
— Adjustment of terminal FM and AM
(calibration) (C0(Pr.900), C1(Pr.901))
94
113
— Changing DU/PU monitored items and clearing cumulative monitors (Pr.52,
92
Pr.170, Pr.171, Pr.268, Pr.563, Pr.564, Pr.891)
Monitor display and monitor output signal
— Changing the monitored item to be output from terminal FM/AM (Pr.54 to
Pr.56, Pr.158, Pr.867)
92
Monitor display and monitor output signal
— Speed display and speed setting (Pr.37, Pr.144, Pr.505)
91
Motor brake and stop operation
— Coast to stop at the specified frequency or lower (Pr.522)
109
Motor brake and stop operation
— DC injection brake (Pr.10 to Pr.12)
Motor brake and stop operation
— Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous
power failure (Pr.261 to Pr.266)
106
Motor brake and stop operation
— Motor stop method and start signal selection (Pr.250)
105
Motor brake and stop operation
— Regeneration unit selection (Pr.30, Pr.70)
90
Motor noise suppression and measures against EMC and leakage current
— Carrier frequency and Soft-PWM selection (Pr.72, Pr.240, Pr.260)
95
Motor noise suppression and measures against EMC and leakage current
— Reducing mechanic resonance (speed smoothing control) (Pr.653, Pr.654)
110
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure
— Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start (Pr.57, Pr.58,
Pr.162 to Pr.165, Pr.299, Pr.611)
93
88
83
5
ADJUSTMENT
Monitor display and monitor output signal
Parameter list
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure
— Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous power failure (Pr.261 to
Pr.266)
106
Operation setting at fault occurrence
— Input phase failure protection selection (Pr.251, Pr.872)
Operation setting at fault occurrence
— Output function of fault code (Pr.76)
96
Operation setting at fault occurrence
— Overspeed detection level (Pr.374)
109
Operation setting at fault occurrence
— Regenerative avoidance operation (Pr.665, Pr.882 to Pr.886)
111
Operation setting at fault occurrence
— Retry at fault occurrence (Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69)
Selection and protection of a motor
— Motor protection from overheat (electronic thermal relay function) (Pr.9,
Pr.51)
87
Selection and protection of a motor
— Motor selection (general-purpose motor, IPM motor) (Pr.71)
Selection of operation mode and command source
— Operation command source and speed command source during communication operation (Pr.338, Pr.339)
107
Selection of operation mode and command source
— Operation mode at power-ON (Pr.79, Pr.340)
96
Selection of operation mode and command source
— Operation mode selection (Pr.79)
96
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel
— Buzzer control of the operation panel (Pr.990)
113
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel
— Operation selection of the operation panel (Pr.161)
103
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel
— Parameter unit language switchover (Pr.145)
101
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel
— PU contrast adjustment (Pr.991)
113
Special operation and frequency control
— PID control (Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.553, Pr.554, Pr.575 to Pr.577, C42(Pr.934)
99
to C45(Pr.935))
Special operation and frequency control
— Switching between the inverter and the bypass operation (Pr.135 to Pr.139,
Pr.159)
101
Useful function (energy saving operation)
— Energy saving monitor (Pr.891 to Pr.899)
112
Useful functions
— Automatic parameter setting (Pr.999)
114
Useful functions
— Current average value monitor signal (Pr.555 to Pr.557)
109
Useful functions
— Fault initiation (Pr.997)
113
Useful functions
— Free parameter (Pr.888, Pr.889)
111
Useful functions
— Lifespan extension of the cooling fan (Pr.244)
105
Useful functions
— Maintenance of parts (Pr.503, Pr.504)
109
Useful functions
— Parameter clear, parameter copy, initial value change list, and automatic pa114
rameter setting (Pr.CL, ALLC, Er.CL, PCPY, Pr.CH, IPM, AUTO)
Useful functions
— Parameter copy alarm release (Pr.989)
113
Useful functions
— To display life of inverter parts (Pr.255 to Pr.259)
106
V/F pattern setting
— Adjustable 5 points V/F (Pr.71, Pr.100 to Pr.109)
97
V/F pattern setting
— Base frequency and voltage (Pr.3, Pr.19, Pr.47)
86
V/F pattern setting
— V/F pattern suitable for the application (Pr.14)
88
84
105
94
94
Parameter list
5.10.2 Display of the extended parameters
Operation
Display
1. Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
PU indicator is lit.
2. Operation mode setting
Press
to choose
the PU operation mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3. Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4. Turn
until
(Pr. 160)
appears.
5. Press
"
6. Turn
"
to read the currently set value.
" (initial value) appears.
to change it to the set value
".
7. Press
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· By turning
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
After parameter setting is completed, press
once to show the fault history and
press
twice to return to the monitor display. To change settings of other parameters,
perform the operation in above steps 3 to 7.
REMARKS
If the setting has not been changed, the value does not flicker and the next parameter number appears.
9999
(Initial Value)
0
1
Description
Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be displayed.
Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
5
ADJUSTMENT
Pr. 160
85
Parameter list
5.10.3 Parameter list
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Manual torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46)
0
46
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
 indicates simple mode parameters.
Torque boost
0.1%
Second torque boost
0.1%
6/4/3/2/
0 to 30%
1.5/1% *
9999
V/F






Set the upper limit of the output frequency.



Set the lower limit of the output frequency.



Set when performing the operation at 120Hz
or more.



Set the output voltage at 0Hz as %.
0 to 30%
Set the torque boost when the RT signal is on.
9999
Without second torque boost
* Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (0.75K / 1.5K to 3.7K / 5.5K, 7.5K / 11K to 37K / 45K, 55K / 75K or higher)
Limiting the output frequency — Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr.1, Pr.2, Pr.18)
1
Maximum frequency
0.01Hz
120/
60Hz *1, 0 to 120Hz
*2
2
18
Minimum frequency
0.01Hz
High speed maximum
0.01Hz
frequency
0Hz
0 to 120Hz
120/
120 to 400Hz
60Hz *1,
*2
*3
*1
*2
The setting depends on the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75k or higher)
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
*3
Even if a value higher than the maximum frequency (refer to page 43) is set in Pr.18 under IPM motor control, the high speed maximum frequency is limited
to the maximum motor frequency.
V/F
V/F pattern setting — Base frequency and voltage (Pr.3, Pr.19, Pr.47)
3
Base frequency
19
Base frequency
voltage
47
Second V/F (base
frequency)
0.01Hz
0.1V
0.01Hz
60Hz
9999
9999
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency when the rated motor torque
is generated. (50Hz/60Hz)
0 to 1000V
Set the base voltage.
8888
95% of power supply voltage
9999
Same as power supply voltage
0 to 400Hz
Set the base frequency when the RT signal is
ON.
9999
Second V/F is invalid
S MFVC









Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Multi-speed setting operation
(Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239)
4
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
0.01Hz
60Hz *
0 to 400Hz
Set frequency when the RT signal is ON.



5
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
0.01Hz
30Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set frequency when the RM signal is ON.



6
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
0.01Hz
10Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set frequency when the RL signal is ON.



Multi-speed setting (4
speed to 7 speed)
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999



Multi-speed setting (8
speed to 15 speed)
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can be
set according to the combination of the RH,
RM, RL and REX signals.
9999: not selected



24
to
27
232
to
239
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
86
Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Acceleration/deceleration time setting
(Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.20, Pr.21, Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.147, Pr.791, Pr.792)
7
Acceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
5s/15s *1
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the motor acceleration time.



8
Deceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
10s/30s 0 to 3600/
*1
360s
Set the motor deceleration time.



60Hz *2 1 to 400Hz
Set the frequency referenced as acceleration/
deceleration time. Set the frequency change
time from stop to Pr. 20 for acceleration/
deceleration time.





















20
Acceleration/
deceleration
reference frequency
21
Acceleration/
deceleration time
increments
0.01Hz
1
Second acceleration/
deceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
5s
45
Second deceleration
time
0.1/
0.01s
9999
147
791
IPM
792
IPM
Acceleration time in
low-speed range
Deceleration time in
low-speed range
0.01Hz
0.1/
0.01s
0.1/
0.01s
Increments: 0.1s
Range: 0 to 3600s
1
Increments: 0.01s
Range: 0 to 360s
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the acceleration/deceleration time when
the RT signal is ON.
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the deceleration time when the RT signal is
ON.
9999
Acceleration time = deceleration time
0
44
Acceleration/
deceleration time
switching frequency
0
9999
Increments and setting
range of acceleration/
deceleration time
setting can be
changed.
Frequency when automatically switching to
0 to 400Hz the acceleration/deceleration time of Pr. 44
and Pr. 45.
9999
No function
0 to 3600/
360s
Acceleration time in the low-speed range
(less than 10% of the rated motor
frequency) is set.
9999
The acceleration time set in Pr.7 is applied.
(When the second function is enabled, the
setting is applied.)
0 to 3600/
360s
Deceleration time in the low-speed range
(less than 10% of the rated motor
frequency) is set.
9999
The deceleration time set in Pr.8 is applied.
(When the second function is enabled, the
setting is applied.)
9999
9999
*1
Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (7.5K or lower/11K or higher)
*2
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Parameter list
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
5
Selection and protection of a motor — Motor protection from overheat (electronic thermal
9
51
V/F
S MFVC
Electronic thermal O/
L relay
0.01/
0.1A *1
Second electronic
thermal O/L relay
0.01/
0.1A *1
Rated
0 to 500/
inverter
Set the rated motor current.
0 to 3600A *1
current *2
9999
0 to 500A/
Valid when the RT signal is ON.
0 to 3600A *1 Set the rated motor current.
9999
*1
The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75k or higher)
*2
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings.(Refer to page 42)






Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid
87
ADJUSTMENT
relay function) (Pr.9, Pr.51)
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
Motor brake and stop operation — DC injection brake (Pr.10 to Pr.12)
10
11
12
V/F
DC injection brake
operation frequency
DC injection brake
operation time
DC injection brake
operation voltage
0.01Hz
0.1s
0.1%
0 to 120Hz *1
Set the operation frequency of the DC injection
brake.
9999
Operate when the output frequency becomes
less than or equal to Pr.13 Starting frequency.
0
DC injection brake disabled
0.1 to 10s
Set the operation time of the DC injection
brake.
0
DC injection brake disabled
0.1 to 30%
Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque).
3Hz
0.5s
4/2/1% *2
S MFVC
*1
Under IPM motor control, the frequency is fixed at 0Hz even if Pr.11"0."
*2
Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity. (7.5K or lower/11K to 55K/75K or higher)















Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Starting frequency (Pr.13, Pr.571)
13
571
V/F
Starting frequency
Holding time at a start
0.01Hz
0.5Hz *
0.1s
9999
S MFVC
0 to 60Hz
Starting frequency can be set.
If the set frequency is set higher than the start
frequency under IPM motor control, the output
starts at 0.01Hz.
0.0 to 10.0s
Set the holding time of Pr.13 Starting frequency.
9999
Holding function at a start is invalid
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings.(Refer to page 42)
V/F pattern setting — V/F pattern suitable for the application (Pr.14)
14
Load pattern selection
1
1
0
For constant-torque load
1
For reduced-torque load
V/F



Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Jog operation (Pr.15, Pr.16)
15
16
Jog frequency *
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
0.01Hz
0.1/
0.01s
5Hz *
0.5s
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency for jog operation.



0 to 3600/
360s
Set the acceleration/deceleration time for jog
operation. Set the time taken to reach the
frequency set in Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency for acceleration/deceleration
time. (Initial value is 60Hz *)
In addition, acceleration/deceleration time
cannot be set separately.






* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings.(Refer to page 42)
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Logic selection of the output stop
signal (MRS) (Pr.17)
17
18
Refer to Pr.1 and Pr.2.
19
Refer to Pr.3.
20, 21
88
MRS input selection
Refer to Pr.7 and Pr.8.
1
0
0
Open input always
2
Normally closed input (NC contact input
specifications)
4
External terminal:Normally closed input
(NC contact input
specifications)
Communication: Normally open input
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Stall prevention (Pr.22, Pr.23, Pr.48,
Pr.49, Pr.66, Pr.148, Pr.149, Pr.154, Pr.156, Pr.157)
22
23
V/F
S MFVC
Stall prevention
operation level
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation factor
at double speed
0.1%
0.1%
48
Second stall
prevention operation
current
49
Second stall
prevention operation
frequency
0.01Hz
Stall prevention
operation reduction
starting frequency
0.01Hz
66
V/F
S MFVC
0.1%
120% *
9999
120%
0
Stall prevention operation selection becomes
invalid.
0.1 to 150%
Set the current value at which stall prevention
operation is started.
9999
Analog variable
0 to 200%
The stall operation level can be reduced when
operating at a high speed above the rated
frequency.
9999
Constant according to Pr. 22
0
Second stall prevention operation invalid
0.1 to 150%
The stall prevention operation level can be set.
0
Second stall prevention operation invalid
0.01 to
400Hz
Set the frequency at which stall prevention
operation of Pr. 48 is started.
9999
Pr. 48 is valid when the RT signal is ON.
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the stall operation
level starts being reduced.
0Hz
148
Stall prevention level
at 0V input
0.1%
120%
0 to 150%
149
Stall prevention level
at 10V input
0.1%
150%
0 to 150%
You can select
whether to use output
voltage reduction
Without output voltage during stall prevention
operation or not.
reduction
1
154
S MFVC
Voltage reduction
selection during stall
prevention operation
1
1
Use these settings
when the overvoltage
protective function
(E.OV) activates
during stall prevention
Without output voltage operation in an
reduction
application with large
load inertia.
With output voltage
reduction
10
11
156
Stall prevention
operation selection
157
OL signal output timer
1
0
0.1s
0s






































With output voltage
reduction
0
V/F
Stall prevention operation level can be
changed by the analog signal input to terminal
1.

0 to 31,
100, 101
Pr. 156 allows you to select whether to use stall
prevention or not according to the acceleration/
deceleration status.
0 to 25s
Set the output start time of the OL signal output
when stall prevention is activated.
9999
Without the OL signal output
5
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
24 to 27 Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Compensation of multi speed and
remote setting inputs (Pr.28)
28
Multi-speed input
compensation
selection
1
Parameter list
Initial
Value
0
Without compensation
1
With compensation
0
89
ADJUSTMENT
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Acceleration/deceleration patterns
and backlash measures (Pr.29, Pr.140 to Pr.143)
29
Acceleration/
deceleration pattern
selection
1
0
0
Linear acceleration/ deceleration
1
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
2
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
3
Backlash measures





















6
V/F
Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration
S MFVC
140
Backlash acceleration
0.01Hz
stopping frequency
1Hz
0 to 400Hz
141
Backlash acceleration
stopping time
0.5s
0 to 360s
142
Backlash deceleration
0.01Hz
stopping frequency
1Hz
0 to 400Hz
143
Backlash deceleration
stopping time
0.5s
0 to 360s
0.1s
0.1s
Set the stopping frequency and time for
backlash measures.
Valid when Pr.29 = "3"
Motor brake and stop operation — Regeneration unit selection (Pr.30, Pr.70)
0
1 *1
Brake unit (FR-BU2 *3, MT-BU5),
power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
2
High power factor converter (FR-HC2),
power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV)
10
30
Regenerative function
selection
1
0
11 *1
20
21 *1
70
*1
*2
*3
90
Special regenerative
brake duty
0.1%
Pr.30 can be set to "1, 11, or 21" for 75K or higher.
Used in combination with GZG, GRZG, or FR-BR.
Used in combination with MT-BR5.
0%
Inverter without regenerative function, brake
unit (FR-BU2 *2, FR-BU, BU)
0 to 10%
Inverter without
regenerative function,
brake unit (FR-BU2 *2,
DC feeding mode 1
FR-BU, BU)
(operated by DC
Brake unit (FR-BU2 *3, feeding only)
MT-BU5),
power regeneration
converter (MT-RC)
Inverter without
regenerative function,
brake unit (FR-BU2 *2,
DC feeding mode 2
FR-BU, BU)
(operated by switching
Brake unit (FR-BU2 *3, between AC and DC)
MT-BU5),
power regeneration
converter (MT-RC)
Set this parameter when a brake unit or
power regeneration converter is used.
(Setting can be made for the 75K or higher.)
Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Limiting the output frequency — Avoiding the mechanic resonance points
(frequency jump) (Pr.31 to Pr.36, Pr.552)
31
Frequency jump 1A
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999



32
Frequency jump 1B
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999



33
Frequency jump 2A
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999



34
Frequency jump 2B
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999



35
Frequency jump 3A
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999



36
Frequency jump 3B
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999















552
Frequency jump
range
0.01Hz
9999
1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B is frequency
jumps (3-point jump)
9999: Function invalid
0 to 30Hz
A total of six jump ranges can be set by
setting the common jump range for the
frequencies set in Pr.31 to Pr.36. (6-point
jump)
9999
3-point jump
Parameter list
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Speed display and speed setting (Pr.37,
Pr.144, Pr.505)
37
*1
*2
Speed display
1
0 *1
144
Speed setting
switchover
1
4 *2
505
Speed setting
reference
0.01Hz
0
Frequency display, setting
1 to 9998
Set the machine speed of Pr. 505.
0, 2, 4, 6, 8,
Set the number of motor poles when displaying
10, 102,104,
the motor speed.
106,108, 110
60Hz *2 1 to 120Hz
Set the frequency that will be the basis of
machine speed display.
Performing IPM parameter initialization sets back the settings to the initial settings. (Refer to page 42)
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Detection of output frequency and current — Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, and
FU2 signals) (Pr.41 to Pr.43, Pr.50, Pr.870)
41
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
0.1%
10%
0 to 100%
Set the level where the SU signal turns ON.



42
Output frequency
detection
0.01Hz
6Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency where the FU signal turns
ON.



43
Output frequency
detection for reverse
rotation
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz ON in reverse rotation.



50
Second output
frequency detection
0.01Hz
30Hz
0 to 400Hz ON.



870
Speed detection
hysteresis
0.01Hz
0Hz *
0 to 5Hz



Set the frequency where the FU signal turns
Same as Pr.42 setting
Set the frequency where the FU2 signal turns
The hysteresis range for the detected
frequency is set.
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
44, 45
Refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.
46
Refer to Pr. 0.
47
Refer to Pr. 3.
48, 49
Refer to Pr. 22 and Pr. 23.
50
Refer to Pr. 41 to Pr. 43.
51
Refer to Pr. 9.
91
ADJUSTMENT
9999
5
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Increments
Name
Parameter
copy
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
clear
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Changing DU/PU monitored items and
clearing cumulative monitors (Pr.52, Pr.170, Pr.171, Pr.268, Pr.563, Pr.564, Pr.891)
52
170
DU/PU main display
data selection
1
Watt-hour meter clear
1
0
9999
0, 5, 6, 8 to 14,
17, 20, 23 to
25, 50 to 57,
100*
Select the monitor to be displayed on the
operation panel and parameter unit.
The setting value of "9" is available only for the
75K or higher.
0
Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
10
Set the maximum value when monitoring from
communication to 0 to 9999kWh.
9999
Set the maximum value when monitoring from
communication to 0 to 65535kWh.
0, 9999
Set "0" to clear the operation time monitor.
Setting "9999" has no effect.
0
Displays the monitor as integral value.
1
Displays the monitor in increments of 0.1.
9999
No fixed decimal position












171
Operation hour meter
clear
1
9999
268
Monitor decimal digits
selection
1
9999
563
Energization time
carrying-over times
1
0
The numbers of cumulative energization time
(0 to 65535) monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed.
Reading only



564
Operating time
carrying-over times
1
0
The numbers of operation time monitor
(0 to 65535) exceeded 65535h is displayed.
Reading only



891
Cumulative power
monitor digit shifted
times



1
0 to 4
Set the number of times to shift the cumulative
power monitor digit.
Clamps the monitor value at maximum.
9999
No shift
Clears the monitor value when it exceeds the
maximum value.
9999
* On the unit I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52 = "55"), the upper LEDs denote the input terminal states and the lower the output terminal states.
RM
RH
RT
RL
AU STOP
RES STF
JOG CS
MRS
STR
Input Terminals
- Display example When signals STF,
RH and RUN are ON
Hz
A
V
Center line is always ON
ABC1
RUN
ABC2
SU
OL
IPF
FU
MON P.RUN
PU
EXT
NET
FWD
REV
Output terminal
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Changing the monitored item to be output
from terminal FM/AM (Pr.54 to Pr.56, Pr.158, Pr.867)
*1
*2
92
54
FM terminal function
selection
55
Frequency monitoring
0.01Hz
reference
56
Current monitoring
reference
158
AM terminal function
selection
867
AM output filter
1
0.01/
0.1A *1
1 to 3, 5, 6,
Select the monitor output to terminal FM.
8 to 14, 17, 21, The setting value of "9" is available only for the
24, 50, 52, 53 75K or higher.






Rated
0 to 500/
Set the full-scale value to output the output current
inverter
0 to 3600A *1 monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
current *2



1 to 3, 5, 6,
Select the monitor output to terminal AM.
8 to 14, 17, 21, The setting value of "9" is available only for the
24, 50, 52, 53 75K or higher.



0 to 5s



1
60Hz *2
1
1
0.01s
0.01s
0 to 400Hz
Set the full-scale value to output the output
frequency monitor value to terminal FM and
AM.
Set the output filter of terminal AM.
The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75K or higher)
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure — Automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure/flying start (Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.162 to Pr.165, Pr.299, Pr.611)
Parameter list
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
V/F control,
Simple magnetic IPM motor control
flux vector control
0
57
Restart coasting time
0.1s
9999
The coasting time is
as follows:
1.5K or lower.....0.5s,
No coasting time
2.2K to 7.5K ......1.0s,
11K to 55K ........3.0s,
75K or higher ....5.0s
0.1 to 5s/
0.1 to 30s *
Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered restart
after an instantaneous power failure.
9999
No restart
0 to 60s
Set a voltage starting time at restart.
























58
V/F
Restart cushion time
0.1s
1s
S MFVC
V/F control,
Simple magnetic IPM motor control
flux vector control
162
163
V/F
S MFVC
164
V/F
S MFVC
165
V/F
S MFVC
299
V/F
S MFVC
611
Automatic restart after
instantaneous power
failure selection
1
0
1
Frequency search only
performed at the first
start
Frequency search
Reduced voltage start only performed at the
only performed at the first start
first start (no frequency
search)
10
Frequency search at
every start
11
Reduced voltage at
every start (no
frequency search)
Frequency search at
every start
First cushion time for
restart
0.1s
0s
0 to 20s
First cushion voltage
for restart
0.1%
0%
0 to 100%
Stall prevention
operation level for
restart
0.1%
120%
0 to 150%
Consider the rated inverter current as 100%
and set the stall prevention operation level
during restart operation.
0
Without rotation direction detection
1
With rotation direction detection
9999
When Pr. 78 = "0", the rotation direction is
detected.
When Pr. 78 = "1", "2", the rotation direction is
not detected.
0 to 3600s
Set the acceleration time to reach the Pr. 20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency at
a restart.
9999
Acceleration time for restart is the normal
acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7).
Rotation direction
detection selection at
restarting
Acceleration time at a
restart
1
0.1s
9999
5/15s *
Set a voltage starting time at restart.
Consider according to the magnitude of load
(moment of inertia/torque).
* The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75k or higher)
93
5
ADJUSTMENT
0
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
Frequency setting with terminals (contact input) — Remote setting function (Pr.59)
RH, RM, RL signal Frequency setting
function
storage function
0
Multi-speed setting
1
Used
2
Not used
Remote setting
59
Remote function
selection
1
0
3
11
12
13

Remote setting
(These setting values
enable deceleration to
the frequency lower
than the set
frequency.)
No (Turning STF/STR
OFF clears remotelyset frequency.)

Energy saving control
selection
1
0

Used
Not used
Not used (Turning
STF/STR OFF clears
remotely-set
frequency.)
Energy saving operation — Energy saving control selection (Pr.60)
60

0
Normal operation mode
4
Energy saving operation mode
9
Optimum excitation control mode
V/F









Operation setting at fault occurrence — Retry at fault occurrence (Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69)
65
67
Retry selection
Number of retries at
fault occurrence
68
Retry waiting time
69
Retry count display
erase
66
1
1
0
0 to 5
A fault for retry can be selected.
0
No retry function
1 to 10
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. A
fault output is not provided during retry
operation.
101 to 110
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence.
(The setting value - 100 is the number of
retries.) A fault output is provided during retry
operation.
0
0.1s
1s
0 to 10s
Set the waiting time from when an inverter fault
occurs until a retry is made.



1
0
0
Clear the number of restarts succeeded by
retry.






Refer to Pr.22 and Pr.23.
67 to 69 Refer to Pr.65.
70
Refer to Pr.30.
Selection and protection of a motor — Motor selection (general-purpose motor, IPM
motor) (Pr.71)
71
Applied motor
1
0*
0
Thermal characteristics of a standard motor
1
Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi
constant-torque motor
2
Thermal characteristic of standard motor
Adjustable 5 points V/F
20
Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or
less)
120
High-efficiency IPM motor MM-EF
210
Premium high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS
and MM-THE4
2010, 2110 For manufacturer setting. (Do not set.)
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
94
Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Motor noise suppression and measures against EMC and leakage current — Carrier frequency
and Soft-PWM selection (Pr.72, Pr.240, Pr.260)
Parameter list
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control
PWM carrier frequency can be changed.
The setting is displayed in [kHz].
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz, 15 indicates
14.5kHz and 25 indicates 2.5kHz.
72
240
260
PWM frequency
selection
1
Soft-PWM operation
selection
1
PWM frequency
automatic switchover
1
2
1 *2
0 to 15/
0 to 6, 25 *1
IPM motor control
0
Soft-PWM invalid
1
When Pr. 72 = "0 to 5" ("0 to 4" for the 75K or
higher), Soft-PWM is valid.
0
PWM carrier frequency is constant
independently of load.
Under the following controls, perform
continuous operation at less than 85% of the
rated inverter current.
V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control
When the carrier frequency setting is 3kHz or
higher (Pr.72 3)
IPM motor control
When the carrier frequency setting is 6kHz or
higher (Pr.72  6)
1 *3
1
*1
*2
*3









You can select the input specifications of terminal
2 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) and input
specifications of terminal 1 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V).
Override and reversible operation can be
selected. To change the terminal 2 to the voltage
input specification (0 to 5V/ 0 to 10V), turn
OFF(initial status) the voltage/current input
switch. To change it to the current input(0 to
20mA), turn ON the voltage/current input switch.



0 to 5 : 2kHz
6 to 9 : 6kHz
10 to 13 : 10kHz
14, 15 : 14kHz
Pr.72 cannot be set to "25" under IPM motor
control.
Decreases PWM carrier frequency
automatically when load increases.
The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75k or higher)
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Performing IPM parameter initialization sets back the settings to the initial settings. (Refer to page 42)
Frequency setting by analog input — Analog input selection, override function, analog
input compensation (Pr.73, Pr.242, Pr.243, Pr.252, Pr.253, Pr.267)
Analog input selection
1
1
0 to 7,
10 to 17
5
242
Terminal 1 added
compensation
amount (terminal 2)
0.1%
100%
0 to 100%
Set the ratio of added compensation amount
when terminal 2 is the main speed.



243
Terminal 1 added
compensation
amount (terminal 4)
0.1%
75%
0 to 100%
Set the ratio of added compensation amount
when terminal 4 is the main speed.



252
Override bias
0.1%
50%
0 to 200%
Set the bias side compensation value of
override function.



253
Override gain
0.1%
150%
0 to 200%
Set the gain side compensation value of
override function.



0
Terminal 4 input 4 to
20mA
1
Terminal 4 input 0 to 5V



267
Terminal 4 input
selection
1
0
2
Turn ON the voltage/
current input switch
(initial status).
Turn OFF the voltage/
Terminal 4 input 0 to 10V current input switch.
95
ADJUSTMENT
73
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
Frequency setting by analog input — Noise elimination at the analog input (Pr.74)
74
Input filter time
constant
1
1
0 to 8
The primary delay filter time constant for the
analog input can be set.
A larger setting results in slower response.





















Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Reset selection and disconnected PU detection (Pr.75)
75
Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection
1
14
0 to 3,
14 to 17
You can select the reset input acceptance,
disconnected PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FRPU07) connector detection function and PU
stop function.
For the initial value, reset always enabled,
without disconnected PU detection, and with
PU stop function are set.
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Output function of fault code (Pr.76)
76
Fault code output
selection
1
0
0
Without fault code output
1
With fault code output
2
Fault code output at fault occurrence only
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Prevention of parameter
rewrite (Pr.77)
77
Parameter write
selection
1
0
0
Write is enabled only during a stop
1
Parameter write is disabled.
2
Parameter write is enabled in any operation
mode regardless of operating status.
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Reverse motor rotation prevention (Pr.78)
78
Reverse rotation
prevention selection
1
0
0
Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
1
Reverse rotation disallowed
2
Forward rotation disallowed
Selection of operation mode and command source — Operation mode selection (Pr.79)
Selection of operation mode and command source — Operation mode at power-ON (Pr.79,
Pr.340)
79
340
96
Operation mode
selection
Communication
startup mode
selection
1
1
0
0
External/PU switchover mode
1
Fixed to PU operation mode
2
Fixed to External operation mode
3
External/PU combined operation mode 1
4
External/PU combined operation mode 2
6
Switchover mode
7
External operation mode (PU operation
interlock)
0
As set in Pr.79.
1, 2
Started in the Network operation mode.
When the setting is "2", it will resume the preinstantaneous power failure operation mode after an
instantaneous power failure occurs.
10, 12
Started in the Network operation mode.
Operation mode can be changed between the
PU operation mode and Network operation
mode from the operation panel.
When the setting is "12", it will resume the preinstantaneous power failure operation mode after an
instantaneous power failure occurs.
0
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Simple magnetic flux vector control
S MFVC
and IPM motor control (Pr.80)
80
*1
*2
Motor capacity
IPM
0.01kW/
0.1kW *1
9999 *2
*1
To select the Simple magnetic flux vector
control and IPM motor control, set the capacity
of the motor used.
9999
V/F control is performed
0.4 to 55/
0 to 3600kW


Parameter list
Initial
Value
All parameter
clear
Increments
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list

The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75k or higher)
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Simple magnetic flux vector control
S MFVC
(Pr.90)
90
Motor constant (R1)
0.001/
0.01m *
9999
0 to 50
0 to 400m*
Used to set the motor primary resistance value.
(Normally setting is not necessary.)
9999
Use the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HRCA)
constants



* The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75k or higher)
V/F pattern setting — Adjustable 5 points V/F (Pr.71, Pr.100 to Pr.109)
V/F
100
V/F1(first frequency)
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
101
V/F1(first frequency
voltage)
0.1V
0V
0 to 1000V



102
V/F2(second
frequency)
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999



103
V/F2(second
frequency voltage)
0.1V
0V
0 to 1000V



104
V/F3(third frequency)
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999



105
V/F3(third frequency
voltage)
0.1V
0V
0 to 1000V



106
V/F4(fourth
frequency)
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999



107
V/F4(fourth frequency
voltage)
0.1V
0V
0 to 1000V



108
V/F5(fifth frequency)
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999



109
V/F5(fifth frequency
voltage)
0.1V
0V
0 to 1000V





Refer to page 94.
5
ADJUSTMENT
71
Set each points (frequency, voltage) of
V/F pattern.
9999: No V/F setting

97
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
Communication operation and setting — Initial setting of RS-485 communication
(Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.551)
Communication operation and setting — Control of parameter write by communication
(Pr.342)
117
PU communication
station number
118
PU communication
speed
119
120
121
122
123
124
342
551
98
PU communication
stop bit length
PU communication
parity check
Number of PU
communication retries
PU communication
check time interval
1
1
1
1
1
0.1s
PU communication
waiting time setting
1
PU communication
CR/LF selection
1
Communication
EEPROM write
selection
1
PU mode operation
command source
selection
1
0
192
1
2
0 to 31
Set the communication speed.
48, 96, 192, The setting value 100 equals the
communication speed.
384
For example, the communication speed is
19200bps when the setting value is "192".
Stop bit length
data length
0
1 bit
8 bits
1
2 bits
8 bits
10
1 bit
7 bits
11
2 bits
7 bits
0
Without parity check
1
With odd parity check
2
With even parity check
0 to 10
Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error.
If the number of consecutive errors exceeds
the permissible value, the inverter trips.
1
9999
9999
1
Specify the inverter station number.
Set the inverter station numbers when two or
more inverters are connected to one personal
computer.
9999
If a communication error occurs, the inverter
will not come to trip.
0
No PU connector communication
0.1 to 999.8s
Set the communication check time interval.
If a no-communication state persists for longer
than the permissible time, the inverter trips.
9999
No communication check
0 to 150ms
Set the waiting time between data transmission
to the inverter and response.
9999
Set with communication data.
0
Without CR/LF
1
With CR
2
With CR/LF
0
Parameter values written by communication are
written to the EEPROM and RAM.
1
Parameter values written by communication
are written to the RAM.
1
Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU
operation mode control source.
2
Select the PU connector as the PU operation
mode control source.
0
2






























Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Frequency setting by analog input — Bias and gain for the frequency setting voltage
(current) (Pr.125, Pr.126, Pr.241, C2(Pr.902) to C7(Pr.905))
125
Terminal 2 frequency
0.01Hz
setting gain frequency
60Hz*
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency of terminal 2 input gain
(maximum).



126
Terminal 4 frequency
0.01Hz
setting gain frequency
60Hz*
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency of terminal 4 input gain
(maximum).



0
Displayed in %
1
Displayed in V/mA



241
Analog input display
unit switchover
C2
(902)
Terminal 2 frequency
0.01Hz
setting bias frequency
0Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency on the bias side of terminal 2
input.



C3
(902)
Terminal 2 frequency
setting bias
0.1%
0%
0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the bias side voltage
(current) of terminal 2 input.



C4
(903)
Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain
0.1%
100%
0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the gain side voltage of
terminal 2 input.



C5
(904)
Terminal 4 frequency
0.01Hz
setting bias frequency
0Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency on the bias side of terminal 4
input.



C6
(904)
Terminal 4 frequency
setting bias
0.1%
20%
0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the bias side current
(voltage) of terminal 4 input.



C7
(905)
Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain
0.1%
100%
0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the gain side current
(voltage) of terminal 4 input.









1
0
Select the unit for
analog input display.
Parameter list
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Special operation and frequency control — PID control (Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.553, Pr.554,
Pr.575 to Pr.577, C42(Pr.934) to C45(Pr.935))
128
129
PID control automatic
switchover frequency
PID action selection
PID proportional band
0.01Hz
1
0.1%
9999
10
100%
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the control is
automatically changed to PID control.
9999
Without PID automatic switchover function
10, 110
PID reverse action
11, 111
PID forward action
20, 120
PID reverse action
21, 121
PID forward action
50
PID reverse action
Deviation value signal
input (LONWORKS, CC-
51
PID forward action
Link communication)
60
PID reverse action
Measured value, set
value input
61
PID forward action
(LONWORKS, CC-Link
communication)
0.1 to 1000%
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter
setting is small), the manipulated variable
varies greatly with a slight change of the
measured value. Hence, as the proportional
band narrows, the response sensitivity (gain)
improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g.
hunting occurs.
Gain K = 1/proportional band
9999
No proportional control
Deviation value signal
(terminal 1)
Measured value input
(terminal 4)
Set value (terminal 2
or Pr. 133)
5



99
ADJUSTMENT
127
130
131
132
133
134
553
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
PID integral time
PID upper limit
PID lower limit
PID action set point
PID differential time
PID deviation limit
0.1s
0.1%
0.1%
0.01%
0.01s
0.1%
1s
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
0.1 to 3600s
When deviation step is input, time (Ti) is the time
required for integral (I) action to provide the same
manipulated variable as the proportional (P) action.
As the integral time decreases, the set point is
reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
9999
No integral control.
0 to 100%
Set the upper limit value.
If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP
signal is output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/
10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is
equivalent to 100%.
9999
No function
0 to 100%
Set the lower limit value.
If the measured value falls below the setting range,
the FDN signal is output.
The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the
measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999
No function
0 to 100%
Used to set the set point for PID control.
9999
Terminal 2 input voltage is the set point.
0.01 to
10.00s
For deviation lamp input, time (Td) required for
providing only the manipulated variable for the
proportional (P) action. As the differential time
increases, greater response is made to a deviation
change.
9999
No differential control.
0 to 100.0%
Y48 signal is output when the absolute value of
deviation amount exceeds the deviation limit value.
9999
No function
0 to 3,
10 to 13
Select the operation to be performed at the
detection of upper, lower, and deviation limit for
the measured value input. The operation for PID
output suspension function can be selected.
0 to 3600s
If the output frequency after PID operation remains
lower than the Pr. 576 setting for longer than the time
set in Pr. 575, the inverter stops operation.
9999
Without output interruption function
























554
PID signal operation
selection
575
Output interruption
detection time
576
Output interruption
detection level
0.01Hz
0Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the output interruption
processing is performed.



577
Output interruption
cancel level
0.1%
1000%
900 to 1100%
Set the level (Pr.577 - 1000%) to release the PID
output interruption function.



C42
(934)
PID display bias
coefficient
0.01
9999
0 to 500.00
Set the coefficient on bias side (minimum) of
terminal 4 input.



9999
Displayed in %.
C43
(934)
PID display bias
analog value
0.1%
0 to 300.0%
Set the converted % on bias side (minimum)
current /voltage of terminal 4 input.



C44
(935)
PID display gain
coefficient
0.01
0 to 500.00
Set the coefficient on gain side (maximum) of the
terminal 4 input.



9999
Displayed in %.
C45
(935)
PID display gain
analog value
0.1%
0 to 300.0%
Set the converted % on gain side (maximum) of
current/voltage of terminal 4 input.



1
0.1s
0
1s
20%
9999
100%
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
100
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Special operation and frequency control — Switching between the inverter and the bypass
V/F
operation (Pr.135 to Pr.139, Pr.159)
135
Electronic bypass
sequence selection
136
137
138
139
159
S MFVC
0
Without electronic bypass sequence
1
With electronic bypass sequence
1s
0 to 100s
0.5s
1
0
MC switchover
interlock time
0.1s
Start waiting time
0.1s
Bypass selection at a
fault
Automatic switchover
frequency from
inverter to bypass
operation
Automatic switchover
frequency range from
bypass to inverter
operation
1
0.01Hz
0.01Hz



Set the operation interlock time of MC2 and
MC3.



0 to 100s
Set the time slightly longer (0.3 to 0.5s or so)
than the time from when the ON signal enters
MC3 until it actually turns ON.



0
Inverter output is stopped (motor coast) at
inverter fault.
Operation is automatically switched to bypass
operation at inverter fault (Not switched when
an external thermal relay operation (E.OHT) or
CPU fault (E.CPU) occurs)



1
0 to 60Hz
Set the frequency to switch inverter operation
to bypass operation.



9999
Without automatic switchover
0 to 10Hz
Valid during automatic switchover operation
(Pr.139  9999)
When the frequency command decreases
below (Pr.139 - Pr.159) after operation is
switched from inverter operation to bypass
operation, the inverter automatically switches
operation to inverter operation and operates at
the frequency of frequency command.
When the inverter start command (STF/STR) is
turned OFF, operation is switched to inverter
operation also.



0
9999
9999
9999
Parameter list
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
Valid during automatic switchover operation
(Pr.139  9999)
When the inverter start command (STF/STR) is
turned OFF after operation is switched from
inverter operation to bypass operation,
operation is switched to inverter operation and
the motor decelerates to stop.
140 to 143 Refer to Pr.29.
Refer to Pr.37.
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — Parameter unit language switchover
5
(Pr.145)
0
145
147
PU display language
selection
1
0
Japanese
1
English
2
Germany
3
French
4
Spanish
5
Italian
6
Swedish
7
Finnish



Refer to Pr.7 and Pr.8.
148,149 Refer to Pr.22 and Pr.23.
101
ADJUSTMENT
144
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
Detection of output frequency and current — Detection of output current (Y12 signal) and zero
current (Y13 signal) (Pr.150 to Pr.153, Pr.166, Pr.167)
150
Output current
detection level
0.1%
120%
151
Output current
detection signal delay
time
0.1s
152
Zero current detection
level
0.1%
153
Zero current detection
time
166
Output current
detection signal
retention time
0.01s
0.1s
0 to 150%
Set the output current detection level.
100% is the rated inverter current.



0s
0 to 10s
Set the output current detection period.
Set the time from when the output current has
risen above the setting until the output current
detection signal (Y12) is output.



5%
0 to 150%
Set the zero current detection level.
Suppose that the rated inverter current is
100%.



0 to 10s
Set this parameter to define the period from
when the output current drops below the Pr.152
value until the zero current detection signal
(Y13) is output.



0 to 10s
Set the retention time when the Y12 signal is
ON.
The Y12 signal ON status is retained.
The signal is turned OFF at the next start.



9999
0
Operation continued
Operation continued
1
Trip (E.CDO)
Operation continued



10
Operation continued
Trip (E.CDO)
11
Trip (E.CDO)
Trip (E.CDO)









0.5s
0.1s
Y12 Signal - ON
167
154
Output current
detection operation
selection
1
0
Y13 Signal - ON
Refer to Pr.22 and Pr.23.
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Condition selection for the
second functions activation (RT signal) (Pr.155)
155
RT signal function
validity condition
selection
1
0
Second function is immediately valid with ON
of the RT signal.
10
Second function is valid only during the RT
signal is ON and constant speed operation.
(Invalid during acceleration/deceleration)
0
156, 157 Refer to Pr.22 and Pr.23.
158
Refer to Pr.54 to Pr.56.
159
Refer to Pr.135 to Pr.139.
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Displaying necessary
parameters only (user group) (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174)
160
1
9999
Only the simple mode parameters can be
displayed.
1
Only the parameters registered in the user
group can be displayed.
0
Simple mode and extended mode parameters
can be displayed.
(0 to 16)
Displays the number of cases registered as a
user group (reading only).
9999
Batch clear the user group registration
User group registered
display/batch clear
1
173
User group
registration
1
9999
0 to 999,
9999
Set the parameter numbers to be registered to
the user group. Read value is always "9999".



174
User group clear
1
9999
0 to 999,
9999
Set the parameter numbers to be cleared from
the user group.
Read value is always "9999".



172
102
User group read
selection
9999
0
Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — Operation selection of the operation
panel (Pr.161)
161
Frequency setting/key
lock operation
selection
1
0
Setting dial frequency
setting
1
Setting dial
potentiometer
10
Setting dial frequency
setting
11
Setting dial
potentiometer
0
162 to 165
Refer to Pr.57 and Pr.58.
166, 167
Refer to Pr.150 to Pr.153.
168, 169
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
170, 171
Refer to Pr.52.
172 to 174
Refer to Pr.160.
Parameter list
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
Key lock invalid







































Key lock valid
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Function assignment of input
terminals (Pr.178 to Pr.189)
1
60
0 to 8,
10 to 12, 14,
16, 24, 25, 60,
62, 64 to 67,
70 to 72, 9999
0 to 8,
10 to 12, 14,
16, 24, 25, 61,
62, 64 to 67,
70 to 72, 9999
179
STR terminal function
selection
1
61
180
RL terminal function
selection
1
0
181
RM terminal function
selection
1
1
182
RH terminal function
selection
1
2
183
RT terminal function
selection
1
3
184
AU terminal function
selection
1
4
185
JOG terminal function
selection
1
5
186
CS terminal function
selection
1
6
187
MRS terminal
function selection
1
24
188
STOP terminal
function selection
1
25
189
RES terminal function
selection
1
62
0 to 8,
10 to 12, 14,
16, 24, 25, 62,
64 to 67,
70 to 72, 9999
0 to 8,
10 to 12, 14,
16, 24, 25,
62 to 67,
70 to 72, 9999
0 to 8,
10 to 12, 14,
16, 24, 25, 62,
64 to 67,
70 to 72, 9999
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Low-speed operation command (RL)
Middle-speed operation command (RM)
High-speed operation command (RH)
Second function selection (RT)
Terminal 4 input selection (AU)
Jog operation selection (JOG)
Selection of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure, flying start
(CS)
7: External thermal relay input (OH)
8: 15-speed selection (combination with three
speeds RL, RM, RH) (REX)
10: Inverter run enable signal (FR-HC2/FR-CV
connection) (X10)
11: FR-HC2 connection, instantaneous power
failure detection (X11)
12: PU operation external interlock (X12)
14: PID control valid terminal(X14)
16: PU/External operation switchover (X16)
24: Output stop (MRS)
25: Start self-holding selection (STOP)
60: Forward rotation command (STF)
(assigned to STF terminal (Pr.178) only)
61: Reverse rotation command (STR)
(assigned to STR terminal (Pr.179) only)
62: Inverter reset (RES)
63: PTC thermistor input (PTC) (assigned to
AU terminal (Pr.184) only)
64: PID forward/reverse action switchover
(X64)
65: PU/NET operation switchover (X65)
66: External/NET operation switchover (X66)
67: Command source switchover (X67)
70: DC feeding operation permission (X70)
71: DC feeding cancel (X71)
72: PID integral value reset (X72)
9999: No function
103
5
ADJUSTMENT
178
STF terminal function
selection
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Function assignment of output
terminals (Pr.190 to Pr.196)
190
RUN terminal function
selection
1
0
191
SU terminal function
selection
1
1
192
IPF terminal function
selection
1
2
193
OL terminal function
selection
1
3
194
FU terminal function
selection
1
4
195
ABC1 terminal
function selection
1
99
196
ABC2 terminal
function selection
1
9999
232 to 239 Refer to Pr.4 to Pr.6.
240
Refer to Pr.72.
241
Refer to Pr.125 and Pr.126.
242, 243 Refer to Pr.73.
104
0 to 5, 7, 8,
10 to 19, 25,
26, 45 to 48,
57, 64, 67,
70, 79, 85,
90 to 96, 98,
99,
100 to 105,
107, 108,
110 to 116,
125, 126,
145 to 148,
157, 164, 167,
170, 179, 185,
190 to 196,
198, 199,
9999
0, 100: Inverter running (RUN)
1, 101: Up to frequency (SU)
2, 102: Instantaneous power failure/
undervoltage (IPF)
3, 103: Overload warning (OL)
4, 104: Output frequency detection (FU)
5, 105: Second output frequency detection
(FU2)
7, 107: Regenerative brake pre-alarm (RBP)
(Only for the 75K or higher)
8, 108: Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm
(THP)
10, 110: PU operation mode (PU)
11, 111: Inverter operation ready (RY)
12, 112: Output current detection (Y12)
13, 113: Zero current detection (Y13)
14, 114: PID lower limit (FDN)
15, 115: PID upper limit (FUP)
16, 116: PID forward/reverse rotation output
(RL)
17, —: Electronic bypass MC1 (MC1) *
18, —: Electronic bypass MC2 (MC2) *
19, —: Electronic bypass MC3 (MC3) *
25, 125: Fan fault output (FAN)
26, 126: Heatsink overheat pre-alarm (FIN)
45, 145: Inverter running and start command is
ON(RUN3)
46, 146: During deceleration at occurrence of
power failure (retained until release)
(Y46)
47, 147: During PID control activated (PID)
48, 148: PID deviation limit (Y48)
57, 157: IPM motor control (IPM)
64, 164: During retry (Y64)
67, 167: During power failure (Y67)
70, 170: PID output interruption (SLEEP)
79, 179: Pulse train output of output power
(Y79)
85, 185: DC current feeding (Y85)
90, 190: Life alarm (Y90)
91, 191: Fault output 3 (power-OFF signal)
(Y91)
92, 192: Energy saving average value updated
timing (Y92)
93, 193: Current average monitor signal (Y93)
94, 194: Fault output 2 (ALM2)
95, 195: Maintenance timer signal (Y95)
96, 196: Remote output (REM)
98, 198: Alarm output (LF)
99, 199: Fault output (ALM)
9999: No function
0 to 99: Positive logic, 100 to 199: Negative
logic
0 to 5, 7, 8,
10 to 19,
25, 26,
45 to 48, 57,
64, 67, 70, 79,
85, 90, 91,
94 to 96,
98, 99,
100 to 105,
107, 108,
110 to 116,
125, 126,
145 to 148,
157, 164, 167,
170, 179, 185,
190, 191,
* Available under V/F control and Simple
194 to 196,
magnetic flux vector control
198, 199, 9999





















Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Useful functions — Lifespan extension of the cooling fan (Pr.244)
244
Cooling fan operation
selection
1
0
Operates at power ON
Cooling fan ON/OFF control invalid (The
cooling fan is always ON at power ON)
1
Cooling fan ON/OFF control valid
The fan is normally on during inverter
operation. The fan switches ON/OFF according
to the temperature during a stop of the inverter
whose status is monitored.
1

Rated slip
246
Slip compensation
time constant
247
Constant-power
range slip
compensation
selection
0.01%
0.01s
1
9999
0.5s
0 to 50%
Used to set the rated motor slip.
9999
No slip compensation
0.01 to 10s
Used to set the response time of slip
compensation. When the value is smaller,
response will be faster. However, as load
inertia is greater, a regenerative overvoltage
(E.OV) error is more liable to occur.
0
Slip compensation is not made in the constant
power range (frequency range above the
frequency set in Pr.3)
9999
Slip compensation is made in the constant
power range.
9999

V/F
Adjusting the output torque (current) of the motor — Slip compensation (Pr.245 to Pr.247)
245

Parameter list
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
S MFVC












Motor brake and stop operation — Motor stop method and start signal selection (Pr.250)
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Start signal selection (Pr.250)
250
Stop selection
0.1s
9999
9999
8888
When the start signal
is turned OFF, the
motor decelerates to
stop.
STF signal:
Forward rotation start
STR signal:
Reverse rotation
start
STF signal: Start
signal
STR signal: Forward/
reverse signal
STF signal:
Forward rotation start
STR signal:
Reverse rotation
start
5
STF signal: Start
signal
STR signal: Forward/
reverse signal
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Input phase failure protection selection (Pr.251,
Pr.872)
251
Output phase loss
protection selection
1
1
872
Input phase loss
protection selection
1
0
0
Without output phase loss protection
1
With output phase loss protection
0
Without input phase loss protection
1
With input phase loss protection






252, 253 Refer to Pr.73.
105
ADJUSTMENT
The motor is coasted
to a stop when the
0 to 100s
preset time elapses
after the start signal is
turned OFF.
When 1000s to 1100s
is set (Pr. 250 setting1000 to 1100s 1000)s later, the motor
coasts to stop.
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
copy
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
clear
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
Useful functions — To display life of inverter parts (Pr.255 to Pr.259)
255
Life alarm status
display
256
(0 to 15)
Displays whether the control circuit capacitor, main
circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each parts of the
inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm
output level or not.



1
0
Inrush current limit
circuit life display
1%
100%
(0 to 100%)
Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush
current limit circuit. Reading only



257
Control circuit
capacitor life display
1%
100%
(0 to 100%)
Displays the deterioration degree of the control
circuit capacitor. Reading only



258
Main circuit capacitor
life display
1%
100%
Displays the deterioration degree of the main
(0 to 100%) circuit capacitor. Reading only
The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.





















259
Main circuit capacitor
life measuring
260
Refer to Pr.72.
1
0
0, 1
Start measuring the main circuit capacitor life.
Switch the power supply ON again and check
the Pr. 259 setting. Measurement is complete if
the setting is "3". Set the deterioration degree
in Pr.258.
Motor brake and stop operation — Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous
power failure (Pr.261 to Pr.266)
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure — Decelerate the
motor to a stop at instantaneous power failure (Pr.261 to Pr.266)
Operation at
undervoltage
or power
failure
261
262
263
Power failure stop
selection
Subtracted frequency
at deceleration start
Subtraction starting
frequency
1
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0
3Hz
Power-failure
deceleration time 1
0.1/
0.01s
5s
265
Power-failure
deceleration time 2
0.1/
0.01s
9999
106
Deceleration
time to a stop
0
Coasts to a stop
Coasts to a stop
-
1
Decelerates
to a stop
Decelerates to a stop
Depends on
Pr. 262 to Pr.
266 settings
2
Decelerates
to a stop
Accelerates again
Depends on
Pr. 262 to Pr.
266 settings
21
Decelerates
to a stop
Decelerates to a stop
Automatically
adjusts the
deceleration
time
22
Decelerates
to a stop
Accelerates again
Automatically
adjusts the
deceleration
time
0 to 20Hz
Normally operation can be performed with the
initial value unchanged. But adjust the frequency
according to the magnitude of the load
specifications (moment of inertia, torque).
0 to 400Hz
When output frequency  Pr.263
Decelerate from the speed obtained from
(output frequency - Pr.262).
When output frequency < Pr.263
Decelerate from output frequency
60Hz *
264
At power restoration
during power failure
deceleration
9999
Decelerate from the speed obtained from
(output frequency - Pr.262).
0 to 3600/
360s
Set a deceleration slope down to the frequency
set in Pr.266.
0 to 3600/
360s
Set a deceleration slope below the frequency
set in Pr.266.
9999
Same slope as in Pr.264
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Increments
: enabled
: disabled
Power failure
deceleration time
switchover frequency
0.01Hz
60Hz *
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the deceleration
slope is switched from the Pr.264 setting to the
Pr.265 setting.









Parameter list
266
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
* Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
267
Refer to Pr.73.
268
Refer to Pr.52.
269
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction — Password function (Pr.296,
Pr.297)
296
297
Password lock level
Password lock/unlock
1
1
9999
9999
0 to 6, 99,
Select restriction level of parameter reading/
100 to 106,
writing when a password is registered.
199
9999
No password lock
1000 to
9998
Register a 4-digit password
(0 to 5)*
Displays password unlock error count.
(Reading only) (Valid when Pr. 296 = "100" to
"106")
9999 *
No password lock
* Pr.297 can be set anytime as Pr.297 = "0 or 9999." However, the setting is invalid (the displayed value does not change).
299
Refer to Pr.57, Pr. 58.
Communication operation and setting — Initial setting of RS-485 communication (Pr.331
to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343, Pr.502, Pr.539, Pr.549 to Pr.551, Pr.779)
Selection of operation mode and command source — Operation command source and
speed command source during communication operation (Pr.338, Pr.339)
Communication operation and setting — Control of parameter write by communication
(Pr.342)
Communication operation and command source — Selection of the NET operation mode
command source (Pr.550)
Communication operation and command source — Selection of the PU operation mode
command source (Pr.551)
RS-485
communication
station number
1
0
0 to 31
(0 to 247)
Set the inverter station number.
(same specifications as Pr.117 ) When "1"
(Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr.551, the
setting range within parentheses is applied.



332
RS-485
communication speed
1
96
3, 6, 12, 24,
48, 96, 192,
384
Used to select the communication speed.
(same specifications as Pr.118)



333
RS-485
communication stop
bit length
1
1
0, 1, 10, 11
Select stop bit length and data length. (same
specifications as Pr.119)



334
RS-485
communication parity
check selection
1
2
0, 1, 2
Select the parity check specifications. (same
specifications as Pr.120)



335
RS-485
communication retry
count
1
1
0 to 10,
9999
Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error. (same
specifications as Pr.121)



0
RS-485 communication can be made, but the
inverter trips in the NET operation mode.
336
RS-485
communication check
time interval



0.1s
0s
0.1 to 999.8s Set the communication check time interval.
(same specifications as Pr.122)
9999
No communication check
107
5
ADJUSTMENT
331
Increments
Initial
Value
RS-485
communication
waiting time setting
1
9999
338
Communication
operation command
source
1
0
Communication
speed command
source
1
341
RS-485
communication CR/
LF selection
1
1
342
Communication
EEPROM write
selection
1
0
343
Description
: enabled
: disabled
337
339
Range
Communication error
count
1
0 to 150ms,
9999
Set the waiting time between data transmission
to the inverter and response. (same
specifications as Pr.123)
0
Operation command source communication
1
Operation command source external
0
Frequency command source communication
1
Frequency command source external
2
Frequency command source external (When
there is no external input, the frequency
command via communication is valid, and the
external command from terminal 2 or 1 is
invalid.)
0, 1, 2
Select presence/absence of CR/LF. (same
specifications as Pr.124)
0
Parameter values written by communication are
written to the EEPROM and RAM.
1
Parameter values written by communication
are written to the RAM.
(read only)
Displays the number of communication errors
during Modbus-RTU communication.
Read only.
Displayed only when Modbus-RTU protocol is
selected.
0
0
At error
Indication
occurrence
0
502
Stop mode selection
at communication
error
1
0
549
550
551
779
108
Modbus-RTU
communication check
time interval
Protocol selection
0.1s
1
NET mode operation
command source
selection
1
PU mode operation
command source
selection
1
Operation frequency
during communication 0.01Hz
error
9999
0
Coasts to
stop
E.SER
Fault
output
At error
removal
Output
Stops
(E.SER)
1
Decelerates E.SER
Output
to stop
after stop after stop
Stops
(E.SER)
2
Decelerates E.SER
to stop
after stop
Without
output
Restarts
Without
output
Operates
normally
3
539
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
copy
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
clear
Parameter list
Continues
running at
Pr. 779
—
0
Modbus-RTU communication can be made, but
the inverter trips in the NET operation mode.
0.1 to
999.8s
Set the interval of communication check time.
(same specifications as Pr. 122)
9999
No communication check (signal loss
detection) is made)
0
Mitsubishi inverter
(computer link)
protocol
1
Modbus-RTU protocol
0
Communication option valid
1
Inverter RS-485 terminal valid
9999
Automatic recognition of the communication option
Normally, the RS-485 terminals are valid.
Communication option is valid when the
communication option is mounted.
1
Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU
operation mode control source.
2
Select the PU connector as the PU operation
mode control source.
0 to 400Hz
Motor runs at the specified frequency at a
communication error.
9999
Motor runs at the frequency used before the
communication error.
9999
2
9999
After setting change,
reset (switch power OFF,
then ON) the inverter.
applied after a reset.




































Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Refer to Pr.79.
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Overspeed detection level (Pr.374)
374
All parameter
clear
Increments
Overspeed detection
level
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
9999
9999
When the motor speed exceeds the speed
set in Pr. 374 under IPM motor control,
overspeed (E.OS) occurs, and the inverter
outputs are stopped.
IPM





















Parameter list
340
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Remote output function (REM
signal) (Pr.495 to Pr.497)
Remote output data
clear at powering OFF Remote output data is
cleared during an
Remote output data
inverter reset
held at powering OFF
0
495
1
Remote output
selection
1
0
Remote output data
clear at powering OFF Remote output data is
retained during an
Remote output data
inverter reset
held at powering OFF
10
11
496
Remote output data 1
1
0
0 to 4095
497
Remote output data 2
1
0
0 to 4095
502
Refer to Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343.
Output terminal can be switched ON and OFF.
Useful functions — Maintenance of parts (Pr.503, Pr.504)
503
Maintenance timer
1
0
504
Maintenance timer
alarm output set time
1
9999
505
0 (1 to 9998)
Displays the cumulative energization time of
the inverter in 100h increments.
When Pr.503 = "1 to 9998", writing the setting
value of "0" clears the cumulative energization
time.
(Writing is disabled when Pr.503 = "0".)
0 to 9998
Set the time taken until when the maintenance
timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.
9999
No function
Refer to Pr.37.
Motor brake and stop operation — Coast to stop at the specified frequency or lower
(Pr.522)
Output stop
frequency
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz
9999
Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop
(output shutoff).
No function
539, 549,
Refer to Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343.
550
551
Refer to Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343.
552
Refer to Pr.31 to Pr.36
5
553, 554 Refer to Pr.127 to Pr.134.
Useful functions — Current average value monitor signal (Pr.555 to Pr.557)
*1
*2
555
Current average time
0.1s
1s
0.1 to 1.0s
Set the time taken to average the current
during start pulse output (1s).



556
Data output mask
time
0.1s
0s
0.0 to 20.0s
Set the time for not obtaining (mask) transient
state data.



557
Current average
value monitor signal
output reference
current
0.01/
0.1A



*1
Rated
0 to 500/
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the
inverter
0 to 3600A *1 signal of the current average value.
current *2
Setting increments and setting range differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or lower/75K or higher)
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
109
ADJUSTMENT
522
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
563, 564 Refer to Pr.52.
571
Refer to Pr.13.
575 to 577 Refer to Pr.127 to Pr.134.
611
Refer to Pr.57 and Pr.58.
Motor noise suppression and measures against EMC and leakage current — Reducing
V/F
mechanic resonance (speed smoothing control) (Pr.653, Pr.654)
S MFVC
653
Speed smoothing
control
0.1%
0%
0 to 200%
The torque fluctuation is reduced to reduce
vibration due to mechanical resonance.



654
Speed smoothing
cutoff frequency
0.01Hz
20Hz
0 to 120Hz
Set the minimum value for the torque
variation cycle (frequency).



665
Refer to Pr.882 to Pr.886.
779
Refer to Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343.



791, 792 Refer to Pr.7 and Pr.8.
Function assignment of external terminal and control — Pulse train output of output
power (Y79 signal) (Pr.799)
799
Pulse increment
setting for output
power
0.1kWh
1kWh
0.1kWh,
1kWh,
10kWh,
100kWh,
1000kWh
Pulse train output of output power (Y79) is
output in pulses at every output current
(kWh) that is specified.
IPM motor control — Control method selection (Pr.800)
800
Control method
selection
1
20
9
IPM motor test operation (Motor is not
driven even if it is connected.)
20
Normal operation (Motor can be driven.)
IPM

IPM motor control — Proportional gain setting for speed loops (Pr.820, Pr.821)
820
Speed control P gain
1
821
Speed control integral
0.001s
time 1
867
Refer to Pr.54 to Pr.56.
870
Refer to Pr.41 to Pr.43.
872
Refer to Pr.251.
110
1%
25%
0.333s


IPM
The proportional gain during speed control
is set. (Setting this parameter higher
0 to 1000% improves the trackability for speed
command changes. It also reduces the
speed fluctuation due to a load fluctuation.)



The integral time during speed control is set.
(Setting this parameter lower shortens the
return time to the original speed when the
speed fluctuates due to external forces. )



0 to 20s
Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Operation setting at fault occurrence — Regenerative avoidance operation (Pr.665, Pr.882
to Pr.886)
Parameter list
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
Acceleration/deceleration time/pattern adjustment — Regenerative avoidance operation
(Pr.665, Pr.882 to Pr.886)
882
883
Regeneration
avoidance operation
level
884
Regeneration
avoidance at
deceleration detection
sensitivity
885
Regeneration
avoidance
compensation
frequency limit value
886
665
*1
*2
Regeneration
avoidance operation
selection
1
0.1V
1
0.01Hz
0
Regeneration avoidance function invalid
1
Regeneration avoidance function is always
valid
2
Regeneration avoidance function is valid only
during a constant speed operation
DC380V
300 to 800V
/760V *1
0
0



Set the bus voltage level at which
regeneration avoidance operates. When the
bus voltage level is set to low, overvoltage
error will be less apt to occur. However, the
actual deceleration time increases.
The set value must be higher than the power
supply voltage  2 .



0 to 5
Set sensitivity to detect the bus voltage
change.
1 (Low)  5 (High)



0 to 30Hz
Set the limit value of frequency which rises at
activation of regeneration avoidance function.



9999
Frequency limit invalid












6Hz *2
Regeneration
avoidance voltage
gain
0.1%
100%
0 to 200%
Regeneration
avoidance frequency
gain
0.1%
100%
0 to 200%
Adjust responsiveness at activation of
regeneration avoidance. Setting a larger value
in Pr.886 will improve responsiveness to the
bus voltage change. However, the output
frequency could become unstable. When
vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the
Pr.886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr.665.
The initial value differs according to the voltage level. (200V / 400V)
Performing IPM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 42)
Useful functions — Free parameter (Pr.888, Pr.889)
Free parameter 1
1
9999
0 to 9999
889
Free parameter 2
1
9999
0 to 9999
Parameters you can use for your own
purposes.
Used for maintenance, management, etc. by
setting a unique number to each inverter when
multiple inverters are used.
5
ADJUSTMENT
888
111
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
Useful function (energy saving operation) — Energy saving monitor (Pr.891 to Pr.899)
891
Cumulative power
monitor digit shifted
times
892
Load factor
893
Energy saving
monitor reference
(motor capacity)
894
Control selection
during commercial
power-supply
operation
895
896
897
898
899
Power saving rate
reference value
Power unit cost
Power saving monitor
average time
Power saving
cumulative monitor
clear
Operation time rate
(estimated value)
1
0.1%
0.01/
0.1kW *
1
1
0.01
1h
1
0.1%
0 to 4
Set the number of times to shift the cumulative
power monitor digit.
Clamps the monitor value at maximum.
9999
No shift
Clears the monitor value when it exceeds the
maximum value.
30 to 150%
9999
100%
Rated
0.1 to 55/
inverter
0 to 3600kW
capacity
0
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999


Set the load factor for commercial powersupply operation.
This value is used to calculate the power
consumption estimated value during
commercial power supply operation.



Set the motor capacity (pump capacity). Set
when calculating power saving rate, power
saving rate average value, commercial power
supply operation power.





















0
Discharge damper control (fan)
1
Inlet damper control (fan)
2
Valve control (pump)
3
Commercial power-supply drive (fixed value)
0
Consider the value during commercial powersupply operation as 100%
1
Consider the Pr.893 setting as 100%.
9999
No function
0 to 500
Set the power unit cost. Displays the power
saving rate on the energy saving monitor
9999
No function
0
Average for 30 minutes
1 to 1000h
Average for the set time
9999
No function
0
Cumulative monitor value clear
1
Cumulative monitor value hold
10
Cumulative monitor continue (communication
data upper limit 9999)
9999
Cumulative monitor continue (communication
data upper limit 65535)
0 to 100%
Use for calculation of annual power saving
amount. Set the annual operation ratio
(consider 365 days  24h as 100%).
9999
No function
* The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75k or higher)
112
*

Initial
Value
Range
Description
: enabled
: disabled
Monitor display and monitor output signal — Adjustment of terminal FM and AM
(calibration) (C0(Pr.900), C1(Pr.901))
C0
(900)
FM terminal
calibration
---
---
---
Calibrate the scale of the meter connected to
terminal FM.



C1
(901)
AM terminal
calibration
---
---
---
Calibrate the scale of the analog meter
connected to terminal AM.















Parameter list
Increments
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
C2 (902)
Refer to Pr.125 and Pr.126.
to
C7 (905)
C42 (934)
Refer to Pr.127 to Pr.134.
to
C45 (935)
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Useful functions — Parameter copy alarm release (Pr.989)
989
Parameter copy
alarm release
1
10/100 * 10/100 *
Parameters for alarm release at parameter
copy
* The setting depends on the inverter capacity (55K or lower/75k or higher)
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — Buzzer control of the operation panel
(Pr.990)
990
PU buzzer control
1
1
0
Without buzzer
1
With buzzer
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel — PU contrast adjustment (Pr.991)
991
PU contrast
adjustment
1
58
0 to 63
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be
performed.
0 (Light)  63 (Dark)
16 to 18,
32 to 34, 48,
49, 64, 80 to
82, 96, 97,
112, 128,
129, 144,
145, 160,
161,
176 to 179,
192 to 194,
196 to 199,
208, 230,
241, 245 to
247, 253
The setting range is same with the one for
fault data codes of the inverter (which can
be read through communication). (Refer to
page 116)
Written data is not stored in EEPROM.
9999
This setting does not initiate a fault.
(The read value is always "9999.")
Useful functions — Fault initiation (Pr.997)
Fault initiation
1
9999
5
ADJUSTMENT
997
113
Increments
Initial
Value
Range
Description
All parameter
clear
Name
Parameter
clear
Related
parameters
Parameter
Parameter
copy
Parameter list
: enabled
: disabled
IPM motor control — IPM parameter initialization (Pr.998)
998
IPM parameter
initialization
1
0
Parameter settings for a general-purpose
motor (frequency)
1
Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM
motor MM-EF (rotations per minute)
12
Parameter settings for a premium
high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS and
MM-THE4 (rotations per minute)
101
Parameter settings for a high-efficiency IPM
motor MM-EF (frequency)
112
Parameter settings for a premium
high-efficiency IPM motor MM-EFS and
MM-THE4 (frequency)
0






22, 32, 122,
For manufacturer setting. (Do not set.)
132
Useful functions — Automatic parameter setting (Pr.999)
999
Automatic parameter
setting
1
9999
10
GOT initial setting (PU connector)
11
GOT initial setting (RS-485 terminals)
20
Rated frequency is 50Hz
21
Rated frequency is 60Hz
30
Acceleration/deceleration time
(0.1s increment)
31
Acceleration/deceleration time
(0.01s increment)
9999
No action
(The read value is always "9999.")
Useful functions — Parameter clear, parameter copy, initial value change list, and automatic parameter setting (Pr.CL, ALLC, Er.CL, PCPY, Pr.CH, IPM, AUTO)
Pr.CL
Parameter clear
1
0
0, 1
Setting "1" returns all parameters except calibration
parameters to the initial values.
ALLC
All parameter clear
1
0
0, 1
Setting "1" returns all parameters to the initial values.
Er.CL
Faults history clear
1
0
0, 1
Setting "1" will clear eight past faults.
0
Cancel
1
Read the source parameters to the operation panel.
2
Write the parameters copied to the operation panel to the
destination inverter.
3
Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel.
---
Changed parameters (changed from the initial settings) are
displayed or set.
0, 1, 12
When "1 or 12" is set, the parameters required to drive an IPM
motor are automatically changed as a batch.
22, 32
For manufacturer setting. (Do not set.)
---
Parameter settings are changed as a batch. Those include
communication parameter settings for a GOT connection,
rated frequency settings of 50Hz/60Hz, and acceleration/
deceleration time increment settings.
PCPY
Parameter copy
Pr.CH
Initial value change
list
IPM
IPM parameter
initialization
AUTO
114
Automatic parameter
setting
1
---
1
---
0
---
0
---
Reset method of protective function
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
When a fault occurs in the inverter, the inverter trips and the PU display automatically changes to one of the following
fault or alarm indications.
If the fault does not correspond to any of the following faults or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales
representative or distributor.
 Retention of fault output signal.................When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the
inverter is opened when a fault occurs, the inverter's control power will be
lost and the fault output will not be held.
 Fault or alarm indication ...........................When a fault or alarm occurs, the operation panel display automatically
switches to the fault or alarm indication
 Resetting method .....................................When a fault occurs, the inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset,
therefore, the inverter cannot restart. (Refer to page 115.)
 When any fault occurs, take the appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
Not doing so may lead to the inverter fault and damage.
Inverter fault or alarm indications are roughly categorized as below.
(1) Error message
A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FRPU04/FR-PU07) is displayed. The inverter does not trip.
(2) Warning
The inverter does not trip even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will
lead to a fault.
(3) Alarm
The inverter does not trip. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
REMARKS
· Past eight faults can be displayed using the setting dial. (Refer to page 131 for the operation.)
The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal accumulated heat value
of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
Inverter recovers about 1s after the reset is released.
Operation 1:...... Using the operation panel, press
to reset the inverter.
(This may only be performed when a fault occurs. (Refer to page 121 for
fault.))
Operation 2:...... Switch power OFF once. After the indicator of the operation panel turns
OFF, switch it ON again.
ON
6
OFF
Operation 3:...... Turn ON the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s. (If the RES signal is
kept ON, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a
reset status.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 Reset method of protective function
Inverter
RES
SD
CAUTION
· OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before resetting the inverter fault. Resetting inverter fault with the start signal
ON restarts the motor suddenly.
115
List of fault or alarm display
6.2 List of fault or alarm display
Operation Panel
Indication
to
Faults history
—
131
HOLD
Operation panel lock
—
117
LOCD
Password locked
—
117
Er1 to 4 Parameter write error
rE1 to 4 Copy operation error
OL
oL
Alarm
Warning
RB
TH
Error
Stall prevention
(overcurrent)
Stall prevention
(overvoltage)
Regenerative brake
pre-alarm
Electronic thermal
relay function prealarm
E.GF
E.LF
117
—
118
E.PTC*
—
118
E.OPT
—
119
E.OP1
—
119
E. 1
—
120
E.PE
—
120
E.PUE
E.RET
PU stop
—
119
MT
Maintenance signal
output
—
120
E.PE2*
CP
Parameter copy
—
120
E. 5
FN
Fan alarm
—
120
E.OC2
E.OC3
E.OV1
E.OV2
E.OV3
E.THT
E.THM
E.FIN
E.IPF
E.BE
Overcurrent trip during
acceleration
Overcurrent trip during
constant speed
Overcurrent trip during
deceleration or stop
Regenerative
overvoltage trip during
acceleration
Regenerative
overvoltage trip during
constant speed
Regenerative
overvoltage trip during
deceleration or stop
Inverter overload trip
(electronic thermal
relay function)
Motor overload trip
(electronic thermal
relay function)
Heatsink overheat
Instantaneous power
failure
Brake transistor alarm
detection/internal
circuit fault
E.UVT Undervoltage
E.ILF*
Input phase loss
E.OLT
Stall prevention stop
16
(H10)
17
(H11)
18
(H12)
121
121
122
32
(H20)
122
33
(H21)
122
E. 6
E. 7
E.CPU
E.CTE
E.P24
E.CDO*
E.IOH*
34
(H22)
123
48
(H30)
123
E.SER*
64
(H40)
80
(H50)
112
(H70)
81
(H51)
82
(H52)
96
(H60)
123
Output side earth
(ground) fault
overcurrent
IPM
124
124
124
125
125
E.13
97
(H61)
125
128
(H80)
125
129
(H81)
External thermal relay 144
operation
(H90)
PTC thermistor
145
operation
(H91)
160
Option fault
(HA0)
Communication option 161
fault
(HA1)
241
Option fault
(HF1)
Parameter storage
176
device fault
(HB0)
177
PU disconnection
(HB1)
178
Retry count excess
(HB2)
Parameter storage
179
device fault
(HB3)
245
(HF5)
246
(HF6)
CPU fault
247
(HF7)
192
(HC0)
RS-485 terminal
193
power supply short
(HC1)
circuit
24VDC power output
194
short circuit
(HC2)
Output current
196
detection value
(HC4)
exceeded
Inrush current limit
197
circuit fault
(HC5)
198
Communication fault
(inverter)
(HC6)
Overspeed occurrence
E.PID* PID signal fault
124
Fault Refer
data
to
code page
Output phase loss
E.AIE* Analog input fault
E.OS
49
(H31)
Name
E.SOT* Loss of synchronism
detection
IPM
PS
E.OC1
Fault
—
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OHT
to
Err.
116
Fault Refer
data
to
code page
Fault
Error message
E---
Name
Internal circuit fault
199
(HC7)
208
(HD0)
230
(HE6)
253
(HFD)
125
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
128
128
129
129
129
129
129
If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
* If an error occurs when using FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is displayed on FRPU04.
Causes and corrective actions
6.3 Causes and corrective actions
(1) Error Message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off.
Description
HOLD
Operation panel lock
Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than
Check point
Corrective action
-------------Press
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
is invalid. (Refer to page 48.)
for 2s to release lock.
LOCD
Password locked
Password function is active. Display and setting of parameter is restricted.
-------------Enter the password in Pr. 297 Password lock/unlock to unlock the password function before operating. (
Refer to
Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied)).
Er1
Write disable error
· You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to disable
parameter writing.
· Frequency jump setting range overlapped.
· Adjustable 5 points V/F settings overlapped.
· The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication.
· Appears if IPM parameter initialization is attempted in the parameter setting mode while Pr.72 = "25."
· Check the setting of Pr. 77 Parameter write selection (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
· Check the settings of Pr. 31 to 36 and Pr.552 (frequency jump). (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
· Check the settings of Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 (Adjustable 5 points V/F). (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
· Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
· Check the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. A sine wave filter cannot be used under IPM motor
control.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Er2
Write error during operation
When parameter writing was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is enabled
independently of operating status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF (STR) is ON.
·
·
·
·
Check the Pr. 77 setting. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Check that the inverter is not operating.
Set "2" in Pr. 77.
After stopping the operation, make parameter setting.
Er3
6
Calibration error
Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close.
Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (
Manual (Applied).)
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
117
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Er4
Mode designation error
· You attempted to make parameter setting in the NET operation mode when Pr. 77 is not "2".
· If a parameter write was performed when the command source is not at the operation panel (FRDU07).
· Check that operation mode is "PU operation mode".
· Check the Pr. 77 setting. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· Check the Pr. 551 setting.
· After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page 77.)
· After setting "2" in Pr. 77, make parameter setting.
· Set Pr.551 = "2 (initial setting)". (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
rE1
Parameter read error
An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy reading.
-------------· Make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 79.)
· Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
rE2
Parameter write error
· You attempted to perform parameter copy write during operation.
· An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy writing.
Is the FWD or REV LED of the operation panel (FR-DU07) lit or flickering?
· After stopping the operation, make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 79.)
· Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
rE3
Parameter verification error
· Data on the operation panel side and inverter side are different.
· An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter verification.
Check for the parameter setting of the source inverter and inverter to be verified.
· Press
Make parameter verification again. (Refer to page 80.)
· Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
rE4
Model error
· A different model was used for parameter writing and verification during parameter copy.
· When parameter copy write is stopped after parameter copy read is stopped.
· Check that the verified inverter is the same model.
· Check that the power is not turned OFF or an operation panel is not disconnected, etc. during
parameter copy read.
· Use the same model (FR-F700(P) series) for parameter copy and verification.
· Perform parameter copy read again.
Operation Panel
Indication
Description
Corrective action
118
to continue verification.
Err.
·
·
·
·
The RES signal is ON.
The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact fault of the connector).
When the voltage drops in the inverter's input side.
While the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) and the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) are
connected to separate power sources, the error may appear when turning ON the main circuit. This
is not a fault though.
· Turn OFF the RES signal.
· Check the connection of PU and the inverter.
· Check the voltage on the inverter's input side.
Causes and corrective actions
(2) Warning
When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OL
OL
Stall prevention (overcurrent)
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until
During
the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip.
acceleration
When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this
function increases the frequency again.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.
During
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function lowers the frequency until the
constant
overload current decreases to prevent overcurrent trip. When the overload current has
speed
decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency
operation
up to the set value.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until
During
the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip.
deceleration
When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this
function decreases the frequency again.
· Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large.(V/F control)
· Check that the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small.
· Check that the load is not too heavy.
· Are there any failure in peripheral devices?
· Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency is not too large.(V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector
control)
· Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is appropriate.
· Check if the operation was performed without connecting a motor under IPM motor control.
· Increase or decrease the Pr. 0 Torque boost value by 1% and check the motor status. (V/F control) (Refer to
page 72.)
· Set a larger value in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 74.)
· Reduce the load weight. Try Simple magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80).
· Check the peripheral devices
· Adjust the Pr.13 setting. Change the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting. (V/F control)
· Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level. (The initial value is
120%.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level
with Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr. 156 Stall prevention
operation selection. (Use Pr. 156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)
· Check the connection of the IPM motor.
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
oL
oL
Stall prevention (overcurrent)
· If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive and exceeds the
regenerative energy consumption capability, this function stops the decrease in
frequency to prevent overvoltage trip. As soon as the regenerative energy has
During
decreased, deceleration resumes.
deceleration · If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when regeneration
avoidance function is selected (Pr. 882 = 1), this function increases the speed to
prevent overvoltage trip. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· Check for sudden speed reduction.
· Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886) is being used? (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (Applied).)
The deceleration time may change.
Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 Deceleration time.
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
PS
6
PS
PU stop
Stop with
of PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. (
For
Pr. 75, refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Check point
Corrective action
Check for a stop made by pressing
of the operation panel.
Turn the start signal OFF and release with
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
.
119
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
RB
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
RB
Regenerative brake pre-alarm
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake
duty value. For the 11K or higher, when the setting of Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty is the initial
value (Pr. 70 = "0"), this protective function is not available. If the regenerative brake duty reaches
100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs.
The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the RBP
signal output, assign the function by setting "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
Appears only for the 75K or higher.
· Check that the brake resistor duty is not high.
· Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values are
correct.
· Increase the deceleration time.
· Check the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values.
TH
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
TH
Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm
Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the
preset level. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor overload trip (E.
THM) occurs.
The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for the THP
signal output, assign the function by setting "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
· Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
· Is the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting is appropriate? (Refer to page 51.)
· Reduce the load weight or the number of operation times.
· Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 51.)
MT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
————
MT
Maintenance signal output
Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time.
When the setting of Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time is the initial value (Pr. 504 = "9999"),
this protective function does not function.
The Pr. 503 Maintenance timer setting is larger than the Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time
setting. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Setting "0" in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer erases the signal.
CP
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
————
CP
Parameter copy
Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of 55K or lower and 75K or
higher.
Resetting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.90, Pr.158, Pr.190 to Pr.196,
Pr.557 and Pr.893 is necessary.
Set the initial value in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
(3) Alarm
When an alarm occurs, the output is not shut off. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter
setting. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
120
FN
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
FN
Fan alarm
For the inverter that contains a cooling fan,
appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan
stops due to a fault or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check the cooling fan for an alarm.
Check for fan failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Causes and corrective actions
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.OC1
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OC During Acc
Overcurrent trip during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated current during
acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
· Check for sudden acceleration.
· Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in vertical lift application.
· Check for output short circuit.
· Check that the Pr. 3 Base frequency setting is not 60Hz when the rated motor frequency is 50Hz.(V/F
control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.
· Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Check that the regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes
larger than the V/F reference voltage at regeneration and overcurrent occurs due to the high
voltage.) (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (IPM motor control)
· Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (IPM motor control)
· Increase the acceleration time.
(Shorten the downward acceleration time in vertical lift application.)
· When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter.
If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.
· Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
· Set the Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control) (Refer to page
52.)
· Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
· Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Set base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage.(V/F control, Simple
magnetic flux vector control) (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (IPM motor control)
· Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, set the automatic restart after instantaneous
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
power failure/flying start function. (IPM motor control) (
(Applied).)
E.OC2
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Stedy Spd OC
Overcurrent trip during constant speed
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated current during
constant speed operation, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
· Check for sudden load change.
· Check for output short circuit.
· Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high
· Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (IPM motor control)
· Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (IPM motor control)
· Keep load stable.
· Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit.
· Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
· Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (IPM motor control)
· Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, set the automatic restart after instantaneous
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
power failure/flying start function. (IPM motor control) (
(Applied).)
121
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
6
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.OC3
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OC During Dec
Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated inverter current
during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated to
stop the inverter output.
· Check for sudden speed reduction.
· Check for output short circuit.
· Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
· Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high
· Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (IPM motor control)
· Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (IPM motor control)
· Increase the deceleration time.
· Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit.
· Check the mechanical brake operation.
· Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
· Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (IPM motor control)
· Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, set the automatic restart after instantaneous
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
power failure/flying start function. (IPM motor control) (
(Applied).)
E.OV1
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OV During Acc
Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
· Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during descending acceleration with lifting load)
· Check if Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is set too low like the no-load current.
· Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load
inertia.
· Decrease the acceleration time.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
· Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.
· Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". (
4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.OV2
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Stedy Spd OV
Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
· Check for sudden load change.
· Check if Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is set too low like the no-load current.
・ Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load
inertia.
· Keep load stable.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
· Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.
· Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". (
Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
122
Refer to Chapter
Refer to
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.OV3
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OV During Dec
Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
· Check for sudden speed reduction.
・ Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load
inertia.
· Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the load)
· Longer the brake cycle.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied).)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
· Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". (
4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.THT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Refer to Chapter
Inv. Overload
Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal O/L relay function) *
If a current not less than 120% of the rated output current flows and overcurrent trip does not occur
(170% or less), the electronic thermal relay activates to stop the inverter output in order to protect the
output transistors. (Overload capacity 120% 60s inverse-time characteristic)
· Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
· Check that Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large (small). (V/F control)
· Check that Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting is appropriate for the load pattern of the using
machine. (V/F control)
· Check the motor for use under overload.
· Increase acceleration/deceleration time.
· Adjust the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting. (V/F control)
· Set the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting according to the load pattern of the using machine. (V/F
control)
· Reduce the load weight.
* Resetting the inverter initializes the internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function.
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.THM
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Motor Ovrload
Motor overload trip (electronic thermal O/L relay function) *
The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced
cooling capability during low-speed operation and pre-alarm (TH display) is output when the integrated
value reaches 85% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting and the protection circuit is activated
to stop the inverter output when the integrated value reaches the specified value. When running a
special motor such as a multi-pole motor or multiple motors, provide a thermal relay on the inverter
output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
· Check the motor for use under overload.
· Check that the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (V/F control, Simple
magnetic flux vector control) (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
· Reduce the load weight.
· For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 Applied motor. (V/F control,
Simple magnetic flux vector control)
· Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
* Resetting the inverter initializes the internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
6
123
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
124
E.FIN
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
H/Sink O/Temp
Heatsink overheat
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink
overheat protection operation temperature.
For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26" (positive logic) or
"126" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (
Refer to Chapter
4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
· Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
· Check for heatsink clogging.
·
·
·
·
Check that the cooling fan is stopped. (Check that
is displayed on the operation panel.)
Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.
Clean the heatsink.
Replace the cooling fan.
E.IPF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Inst. Pwr. Loss
Instantaneous power failure
If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the instantaneous
power failure protective function is activated to trip the inverter in order to prevent the control circuit from
malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms, the fault output is not provided, and the
inverter restarts if the start signal is ON upon power restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an
instantaneous power failure is within 15ms.) In some operating status (load magnitude, acceleration/
deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration.
Refer to Chapter 4
When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (
of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
· Remedy the instantaneous power failure.
· Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure.
· Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57). (
Refer to Chapter 4
of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
E.BE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Br. Cct. Fault
Brake transistor alarm detection/internal circuit fault
This function stops the inverter output if a fault occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake
transistors when using functions of the 75K or higher.
In this case, the inverter must be powered OFF immediately.
For the 55K or lower, it appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
· Reduce the load inertia.
· Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.
· Check that the brake resistor selected is correct.
For the 75K or higher, when the protective function is activated even if the above measures are taken,
replace the brake unit with a new one.
For the 55K or lower, replace the inverter.
E.UVT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Under Voltage
Undervoltage
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions.
In addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if
the power supply voltage decreases below about 150V (300VAC for the 400V class), this function
stops the inverter output.
When a jumper is not connected across P/+ and P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated.
When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (Applied))
· Check for start of large-capacity motor.
· Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P/+ and P1.
· Check the power supply system equipment such as the power supply.
· Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P/+ and P1.
· If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
Causes and corrective actions
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.ILF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
Input phase loss
Input phase loss
This fault is output when function valid setting (=1) is set in Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection
and one phase of the three phase power input is lost.
When the setting of Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection is the initial value (Pr. 872 = "0"), this fault
does not occur. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
· Wire the cables properly.
· Repair a break portion in the cable.
· Check the Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection setting.
E.OLT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Stll Prev STP
Stall prevention stop
If the frequency has fallen to 0.5Hz(1.5Hz under IPM motor control) by stall prevention operation and
remains for 3s, a fault (E.OLT) appears and trips the inverter. OL appears while stall prevention is being
activated.
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
Check the motor for use under overload. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Check that a motor is connected during IPM motor control. (IPM motor control)
Check for insufficient torque in the low-speed range under IPM motor control.
Reduce the load weight.
Check the connection of the IPM motor. (IPM motor control)
Set the IPM motor test operation. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
Under IPM motor control, set the longer acceleration/deceleration time in the low-speed range in
Pr.791 and Pr.792.
E.SOT
FR-PU04
Fault 14
IPM
FR-PU07
Motor step out
Loss of synchronism detection
Stops the output when the operation is not synchronized. (This function is only available under IPM
motor control.)
· Check that the IPM motor is not driven overloaded.
· Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the IPM motor is coasting.
· Check if a motor other than the IPM motor (MM-EFS series, MM-THE4 series, or MM-EF series) is
driven.
· Set the acceleration time longer.
· Reduce the load.
· If the inverter restarts during coasting, set Pr.57 Restart coasting time "9999," and select the
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure.
· Drive the IPM motor (MM-EFS series, MM-THE4 series, or MM-EF series).
E.GF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Ground Fault
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
This function stops the inverter output if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth
(ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output (load) side.
Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection cable.
Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
E.LF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
E. LF
Output phase loss
This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side
(load side) is lost.
· Check the wiring (Check that the motor is normal.)
· Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
· Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (IPM motor control)
· Wire the cables properly.
· Choose inverter and motor capacities that match.
· Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure/flying start function. (IPM motor control) (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(Applied)
125
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
6
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
126
E.OHT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OH Fault
External thermal relay operation
If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection, or the internally mounted
temperature relay in the motor, etc. switches ON (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.
This function is available when "7" (OH signal) is set to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection).
When the initial value (without OH signal assigned) is set, this protective function is not available.
· Check for motor overheating.
· Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection).
· Reduce the load and operating duty.
· Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
E.PTC
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
PTC activated
PTC thermistor operation
Trips when the motor overheat status is detected for 10s or more by the external PTC thermistor input
connected to the terminal AU.
This fault is available when "63" is set in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection and AU/PTC switchover
switch is set in PTC side. When the initial value (Pr. 184 = "4") is set, this protective function is not
available.
· Check the connection between the PTC thermistor switch and thermal relay protector.
· Check the motor for operation under overload.
· Is valid setting ( = 63) selected in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection ? (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Reduce the load weight.
E.OPT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Option Fault
Option fault
· Appears when the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 accidentally when
a high power factor converter is connected.
· Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
· Appears when a communication option is connected while Pr. 296 Password lock level = "0 or 100."
· Check that the AC power supply is not connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when a high
power factor converter (FR-HC2) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) is connected.
· Check if password lock is activated by setting Pr. 296 = "0, 100"
· Check the parameter (Pr. 30) setting and wiring.
· The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
when a high power factor converter is connected. Please contact your sales representative.
· Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (
Refer to
Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
· To apply the password lock when installing a communication option, set Pr.296  "0,100". (
Refer
to Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).).
· If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
E.OP1
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Option 1 Fault
Communication option fault
Stops the inverter output when a communication line fault occurs in the communication option.
· Check for a wrong option function setting and operation.
· Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
· Check for a break in the communication cable.
· Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
· Check the option function setting, etc.
· Connect the plug-in option securely.
· Check the connection of communication cable.
Causes and corrective actions
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E. 1
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 1
Option fault
Stops the inverter output if a contact fault or the like of the connector between the inverter and
communication option occurs.
Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
· Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
· Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter.
· Connect the plug-in option securely.
· Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
inverter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative
or distributor.
· Return the switch position for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (
Refer to instruction manual of each option)
E.PE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Corrupt Memry
Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)
Trips when a fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable
RAM write. Note that powering OFF returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.
E.PE2
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
PR storage alarm
Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board)
Trips when a fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
——————
Please contact your sales representative.
E.PUE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
PU Leave Out
PU disconnection
· This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended,
e.g. the operation panel and parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr.
75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. This protective function is not available in
the initial setting (Pr. 75 = "14").
· This function stops the inverter output when communication errors occurred consecutively for more
than permissible number of retries when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121 Number of PU
communication retries during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
· This function stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 122
PU communication check time interval during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
· Check that the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted tightly.
· Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Fit the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) securely.
E.RET
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Retry No Over
Retry count excess
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function trips the inverter.
This function is available only when Pr. 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence is set. When the initial
value (Pr. 67 = "0") is set, this protective function is not available.
Find the cause of fault occurrence.
Eliminate the cause of the fault preceding this error indication.
127
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
6
Causes and corrective actions
E. 5
Operation Panel
Indication
E. 6
E. 7
Fault 5
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
E.CPU
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
128
Fault 6
Fault 7
CPU Fault
CPU fault
Stops the inverter output if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
· Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
inverter.
· Please contact your sales representative.
E.CTE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
————
E.CTE
RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
When the internal power supply for RS-485 terminals are shorted, this function shuts off the power
output.
At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made.
To reset, enter the RES signal or switch power OFF, then ON again.
· Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
· Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals
E.P24
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
E.P24
24VDC power output short circuit
When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, all external contact inputs switch OFF. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES
signal. To reset it, use the operation panel or switch power OFF, then ON again.
· Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
· Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
E.CDO
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
OC detect level
Output current detection value exceeded
This function stops the inverter output when the output current exceeds the setting of Pr.150 Output
current detection level, or the output current falls below the setting of Pr.152 Zero current detection level.
This function is active when Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection is set to "1, 10, 11".
When the initial value (Pr. 167 = "0") is set, this fault does not occur.
Check the settings of Pr. 150 Output current detection level, Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time,
Pr. 152 Zero current detection level, Pr. 153 Zero current detection time, Pr. 166 Output current detection signal
retention time, Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection. (
Refer to Chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (Applied).)
E.IOH
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
Inrush overheat
Inrush current limit circuit fault
Trips when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheats. The inrush current limit circuit fault
· Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
· Check that no meltdown is found in the input side fuse (5A) in the power supply circuit of the inrush
current suppression circuit contactor (FR-F740P-132K or higher) or no fault is found in the power
supply circuit of the contactor.
· Check that the power supply circuit of inrush current limit circuit contactor is not damaged.
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
Causes and corrective actions
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check Point
Corrective Action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Corrective action
E.SER
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
VFD Comm error
Communication fault (inverter)
This function stops the inverter output when communication error occurs consecutively for more than
permissible retry count when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 335 RS-485 communication retry count
during RS-485 communication from the RS-485 terminals. This function also stops the inverter output if
communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval.
Check the RS-485 terminal wiring.
Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.
E.AIE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
Analog in error
Analog input fault
Stops the inverter output when a 30mA or higher current or a 7.5V or higher voltage is input to terminal
2 while the current input is selected by Pr.73 Analog input selection, or to terminal 4 while the current
input is selected by Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection.
Check the setting of Pr. 73 Analog input selection and Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection. (
Refer to
Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied).)
Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 73 Analog input selection or Pr. 267 Terminal
4 input selection to voltage input.
E.OS
IPM
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
E.OS
Overspeed occurrence
Stops the inverter outputs when the motor speed exceeds the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level under
IPM motor control. This protective function is available while the IPM motor control is selected.
· Check that the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value is correct.
· Set the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value correctly.
FR-PU04
E.PID
FR-PU07
Fault 14
Fault
PID Signal Error
PID signal fault
If any of PID upper limit (FUP), PID lower limit (FDN), and PID deviation limit (Y48) turns ON during PID
control, inverter shuts off the output. This function is active under the following parameter settings: Pr.554 PID
signal operation selection  "0,10", Pr.131 PID upper limit  "9999", Pr.132 PID lower limit  "9999", and Pr.553 PID
deviation limit  "9999". This protective function is not active in the initial setting (Pr.554 = "0", Pr.131 = "9999",
Pr.132 = "9999", Pr.553 = "9999").
· Check if the measured PID value is greater than the upper limit (Pr.131) or smaller than the lower limit
(Pr.132).
· Check if the absolute PID deviation value is greater than the limit value (Pr.553).
Make correct settings for Pr.131 PID upper limit, Pr.132 PID lower limit, Pr.553 PID deviation limit. (
Refer to
Chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (Applied))
E.13
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 13
Internal circuit fault
Trips when an internal circuit error occurred.
Please contact your sales representative.
CAUTION
• If protective functions of E.ILF, E.SOT, E.PTC, E.PE2, E.CDO, E.IOH, E.SER, E.AIE, E.PID are activated when using the FRPU04, "Fault 14" appears.
Also when the faults history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
• If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
129
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
6
Correspondences between digital and
actual characters
6.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters
There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters
displayed on the operation panel.
Actual
130
Digital
Actual
Digital
Actual
0
A
M
1
B
N
2
C
O
3
D
o
4
E
P
5
F
S
6
G
T
7
H
U
8
I
V
9
J
r
L
-
Digital
Check and clear of the faults history
6.5 Check and clear of the faults history
(1) Check for the faults history
Monitor/frequency setting
Parameter setting
[Operation panel is used
for operation]
Faults history
[Parameter setting change]
[Operation for displaying faults history]
Eight past faults can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault exists,
is displayed.
Output frequency
Flickering
*1
Output current
Flickering
Flickering
*2
Energization time
Flickering
Output voltage
Flickering
Faults history number
(The number of past faults is displayed.)
Press the
setting
dial.
Flickering
*1
*2
Press the
setting
dial.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Flickering
Press the
setting
dial.
When an overcurrent trip occurs by an instant overcurrent, the monitored current value saved in the faults history may be lower than the actual
current that has flowed.
The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.
When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) in the indication of 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added
up from 0.
131
6
Check and clear of the faults history
(2) Clearing procedure
POINT
· The faults history can be cleared by setting "1" in Er.CL Faults history clear.
Display
Operation
1.Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
2.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3.Turn
until
(faults history clear)
appears.
4.Press
"
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
5.Turn
to change
it to the setting value " ".
6.Press
to set.
Flicker ··· Faults history clear complete!!
132
· Press
to read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
Check first when you have a trouble
6.6
Check first when you have a trouble
POINT
· If the cause of malfunction is still unknown after performing applicable checks, initialization of parameter settings
is recommended. Reset the parameter settings and set the required parameters again, then perform the checks
again.
· Where
is indicated in the "Refer to page" column, refer to the Instruction Manual (Applied).
6.6.1
Motor does not start
Check
points
Possible Cause
Countermeasures
Refer
to
page
Power ON a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB), an
earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or a magnetic
contactor (MC).
—
Appropriate power supply voltage is not applied.
Check for the decreased input voltage, input phase loss,
(Operation panel display is not provided.)
and wiring.
If only the control power is ON when using a separate
power source for the control circuit, turn ON the main
Main
17
circuit power.
Check the wiring between the inverter and the motor.
Circuit
If the electronic bypass function is active, check the
Motor is not connected properly.
wiring of the magnetic contactor connected between the
11
inverter and the motor. (V/F control, Simple magnetic
flux vector control)
The jumper across P/+ and P1 is disconnected.
(55K or lower)
Securely fit a jumper across P/+ and P1.
When using a DC reactor (FR-HEL), remove the jumper
11
across P/+ and P1, and then connect the DC reactor.
Check the start command source, and input a start
Start signal is not input.
signal.
PU operation mode:
/
2
External operation mode : STF/STR signal
Turn ON only one of the forward and reverse rotation
start signals (STF or STR).
STR) are input simultaneously.
If STF and STR signals are turned ON simultaneously in
19
the initial setting, a stop command is given.
Frequency command is zero.
Check the frequency command source and enter a
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
frequency command.
AU signal is not ON when terminal 4 is used for
frequency setting.
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
Turning ON the AU signal activates terminal 4 input.
19
Turn MRS or RES signal OFF.
Input
Signal
Turn ON the AU signal.
2
Output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is ON.
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
Inverter starts the operation with a given start command
and a frequency command after turning OFF MRS or
RES signal.
Before turning OFF, ensure the safety.
CS signal is OFF when automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr. 57
"9999").
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering. )
Turn ON the CS signal.
6
Restart operation is enabled when restart after
instantaneous power signal (CS) is ON.
Check that the control logic switchover jumper connector
Jumper connector of sink - source is wrongly selected.
is correctly installed.
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
If it is not installed correctly, input signal is not
22
recognized.
Voltage/current input switch is not correctly set for analog
Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch
input signal (0 to 5V/0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA).
correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
the setting.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Both the forward and reverse rotation start signals (STF,
19
133
Check first when you have a trouble
Check
points
Possible Cause
Signal
(Operation panel indication is
Refer
to
page
During the External operation mode, check the method
was pressed.
Input
Countermeasures
(PS).)
Two-wire or three-wire type connection is wrong.
Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is improper when V/F control is
used.
of restarting from a
input stop from PU.
Check the connection.
Connect STOP signal when three-wire type is used.
119
105
Increase Pr. 0 setting by 0.5% increments while
observing the rotation of a motor.
72
If that makes no difference, decrease the setting.
Check the Pr. 78 setting.
Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is set.
Set Pr. 78 when you want to limit the motor rotation to
96
only one direction.
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is wrong.
Check the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7)
are improper.
settings.
running frequency.
Setting
methods of start command and frequency command.
Bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings
Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting is greater than the
Parameter
Select the operation mode which corresponds with input
The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal
Set the frequency command according to the
application.
Especially, Pr. 1 Maximum frequency is zero.
Set Pr. 1 higher than the actual frequency used.
Pr. 15 Jog frequency setting is lower than Pr. 13 Starting
Set Pr. 15 Jog frequency higher than Pr. 13 Starting
frequency.
frequency.
Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select
an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
Start signal operation selection is set by the Pr. 250 Stop
Check Pr. 250 setting and connection of STF and STR
selection
signals.
deceleration stop function is selected.
88
is less than the value set in Pr. 13.
as multi-speed operation) are zero.
The motor is decelerated to a stop when power failure
99
Set running frequency higher than Pr. 13.
Frequency settings of various running frequency (such
Operation mode and a writing device do not match.
2
73
88
77, 108
105
When power is restored, ensure the safety, and turn
OFF the start signal once, then turn ON again to restart.
106
The motor restarts when Pr. 261="2, 22".
 Set Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection = "1"
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
function or power failure stop function is activated.
(Performing overload operation during input phase loss
may cause voltage insufficiency, and that may result in
detection of power failure.)
(input phase failure protection active).
 Disable the automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure function and power failure stop function.
 Reduce the load.
93, 106
 Increase the acceleration time if the automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure function or power
failure stop function occurred during acceleration.
DC feeding mode 1 or mode 2 is not selected in Pr.30
Regenerative function selection even though the DC is fed
through terminal P and N.
IPM motor test operation is selected under IPM motor
control.
Load
134
Set the DC feeding mode in Pr.30 Regenerative function
selection.
Set "20" in Pr.800 Control method selection.
88
110
Load is too heavy.
Reduce the load.
—
Shaft is locked.
Inspect the machine (motor).
—
Check first when you have a trouble
6.6.2
Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise
When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency of 3kHz (6kHz during IPM motor control) or more set in Pr. 72, the
carrier frequency will automatically decrease if the output current of the inverter exceeds the value in parentheses of the rated
output current on page 149. This may cause the motor noise to increase. But it is not a fault.
Check
points
Possible Cause
Input
signal
Parameter
Disturbance due to EMI when frequency command is
given from analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4).
Countermeasures
Take countermeasures against EMI.
Increase the Pr. 74 Input filter time constant if steady
operation cannot be performed due to EMI.
Setting
Refer
to
page
96
In the initial setting, Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection is
No carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are
generated.
enabled to change motor noise to an unoffending
complex tone. Therefore, no carrier frequency noises
95
(metallic noises) are generated.
Set Pr. 240 = "0" to disable this function.
Set Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 and Pr.552 (Frequency jump).
Resonance occurs. (output frequency)
Parameter
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the
natural frequency of a mechanical system, these
91
parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
Change Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Setting
Resonance occurs. (carrier frequency)
Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect
on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical
95
system or a motor.
To stabilize the measured value, change the proportional
band (Pr. 129) to a larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130)
Gain adjustment during PID control is insufficient.
to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134)
99
to a slightly shorter time.
Check the calibration of set point and measured value.
Mechanical looseness
Others
Adjust machine/equipment so that there is no
mechanical looseness.
—
Contact the motor manufacturer.
Motor
Possible Cause
Fan cover was not correctly installed when a cooling fan
Fan
was replaced.
Countermeasures
Install the fan cover correctly.
Refer
to
page
145
Motor generates heat abnormally
Check
points
Motor
Main
Circuit
Parameter
Setting
—
—
Inverter generates abnormal noise
Check
points
6.6.4
Check the motor wiring.
Possible Cause
Countermeasures
Motor fan is not working
Clean the motor fan.
(Dust is accumulated.)
Improve the environment.
Phase to phase insulation of the motor is insufficient.
Check the insulation of the motor.
The inverter output voltage (U, V, W) are unbalanced.
Check the output voltage of the inverter.
Check the insulation of the motor.
The Pr. 71 Applied motor setting is wrong. (V/F control,
Check the Pr. 71 Applied motor setting. (V/F control,
Simple magnetic flux vector control)
Simple magnetic flux vector control)
Motor current is large.
Refer to "6.6.11 Motor current is too large"
Refer
to
page
—
—
141
94
138
135
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.6.3
Operating with output phase loss
6
Check first when you have a trouble
6.6.5
Motor rotates in the opposite direction
Check
points
Possible Cause
Main
Circuit
Input
Countermeasures
Phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is
Connect phase sequence of the output cables (terminal
incorrect.
U, V, W) to the motor correctly
The start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are
Check the wiring. (STF: forward rotation , STR: reverse
connected improperly.
rotation)
Refer
to
page
11
19
The polarity of the frequency command is negative
signal
during the polarity reversible operation set by Pr. 73
Check the polarity of the frequency command.
Analog input selection.
6.6.6
Speed greatly differs from the setting
Check
points
Possible Cause
Frequency setting signal is incorrectly input.
Input
The input signal lines are affected by external EMI.
signal
Countermeasures
Measure the input signal level.
shielded wires for input signal lines.
Minimum frequency, Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
Setting
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings
Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings.
are improper.
During IPM motor control, maximum frequency is limited
to the maximum motor speed (frequency) of the IPM
motor.
Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump) settings are improper.
Load
Parameter
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
Setting
86
99
162,
164
Narrow down the range of frequency jump.
91
Reduce the load weight.
—
Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in
89
frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC).)
Motor
6.6.7
—
Take countermeasures against EMI such as using
Check the settings of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, Pr. 2
Parameter
Refer
to
page
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
—
Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth
Check
points
Parameter
Setting
Possible Cause
Countermeasures
Acceleration/deceleration time is too short.
Increase acceleration/deceleration time.
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F
Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by
control, so the stall prevention function is activated.
0.5% increments to the setting.
The base frequency does not match the motor
characteristics under V/F control or Simple magnetic
flux vector control.
Set Pr. 3 Base frequency and Pr. 47 Second V/F (base
frequency).
Refer
to
page
74
72
86
If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration
Regeneration avoidance operation is performed
avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr. 886
111
Regeneration avoidance voltage gain.
Load
Parameter
Setting
Motor
136
Reduce the load weight.
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
—
Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in
89
frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC).)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
—
Check first when you have a trouble
6.6.8
Speed varies during operation
Check
points
Possible Cause
Load
Countermeasures
Load varies during an operation. (V/F control)
Select Simple magnetic flux vector control
Frequency setting signal is varying.
Check the frequency setting signal.
Set filter to the analog input terminal using Pr. 74 Input
The frequency setting signal is affected by EMI.
Input
filter time constant.
Refer
to
page
97,
—
96
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using
shielded wires for input signal lines.
signal
Malfunction is occurring due to the undesirable current
generated when the transistor output unit is connected.
Multi-speed command signal is chattering.
Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too large.
Use terminal PC (terminal SD when source logic) as a
common terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by
23
undesirable current.
Take countermeasures to suppress chattering.
Change the Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage setting (about
3%) under V/F control.
—
86
The Pr.80 Motor capacity setting is inappropriate for the
inverter and motor capacities under Simple magnetic
Check the Pr. 80 Motor capacity setting.
97
flux vector control and IPM motor control.
Wiring length is too long for V/F control, and a voltage
drop occurs.
Adjust Pr. 0 Torque boost by increasing with 0.5%
increments for low-speed operation.
Change to Simple magnetic flux vector control.
Parameter
72
97
Disable automatic control functions, such as energy
Setting
saving operation, fast-response current limit function,
regeneration avoidance function, Simple magnetic flux
Hunting occurs by the generated vibration, for example,
when structural rigidity at load side is insufficient.
vector control and stall prevention.
For PID control, set smaller values to Pr.129 PID
—
proportional band and Pr.130 PID integral time.
Lower the control gain, and adjust to increase the
stability.
Change Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Operation mode is not changed properly
Check
points
Input
signal
Possible Cause
Countermeasures
Refer
to
page
Check that the STF and STR signals are OFF.
Start signal (STF or STR) is ON.
When either is ON, the operation mode cannot be
77
changed.
When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is "0" (initial
value), the inverter is placed in the External operation
mode at input power ON. To switch to the PU operation
Parameter
Pr. 79 setting is improper.
mode, press
on the operation panel (press
77
when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used) .
Setting
At other settings (1 to 4, 6, 7), the operation mode is
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.6.9
95
limited accordingly.
Operation mode and a writing device do not
Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select
correspond.
an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
77, 108
137
6
Check first when you have a trouble
6.6.10 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating
Check
points
Main
Circuit,
Control
Circuit
Possible Cause
Power is not input.
Countermeasures
Input the power.
Refer
to
page
9
Check if the inverter front cover is installed securely.
Front
Operation panel is not properly connected to the
cover
inverter.
The inverter cover may not fit properly when using wires
whose size are 1.25mm2 or larger, or when using many
6
wires, and this could cause a contact fault of the
operation panel.
6.6.11 Motor current is too large
Check
points
Possible Cause
Countermeasures
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F
Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by
control, so the stall prevention function is activated.
0.5% increments to the setting.
Refer
to
page
72
Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency.
(V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
Parameter
V/F pattern is improper when V/F control or Simple
Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage
magnetic flux vector control is performed.
(e.g. rated motor voltage). (V/F control, Simple magnetic
(Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19)
flux vector control)
Change Pr. 14 Load pattern selection according to the load
Setting
characteristic. (V/F control)
Reduce the load weight.
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
88
—
Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in
89
frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC).)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
138
86
—
Check first when you have a trouble
6.6.12 Speed does not accelerate
Check
points
Possible Cause
Start command and frequency command are chattering.
Input
The wiring length used for analog frequency command
signal
is too long, and it is causing a voltage (current) drop.
Input signal lines are affected by external EMI.
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings
are improper.
Countermeasures
Check if the start command and the frequency
command are correct.
during the external operation. (Pr.125, Pr.126, Pr.18)
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F
Parameter
control, so the stall prevention function is activated.
Setting
V/F pattern is improper when V/F control or Simple
magnetic flux vector control is performed.
(Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19)
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
—
Perform analog input bias/gain calibration.
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using
shielded wires for input signal lines.
Check the settings of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2
Minimum frequency. If you want to run the motor at 120Hz
or higher, set Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings.
During IPM motor control, maximum frequency is limited to
the maximum motor speed (frequency) of the IPM motor.
The maximum voltage (current) input value is not set
Refer
to
page
Check the Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
frequency and Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency settings. To operate at 120Hz or higher, set
Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency.
Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by
0.5% increments so that stall prevention does not occur.
Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency.
(V/F control, Simple magnetic flux vector control)
Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage
(e.g. rated motor voltage). (V/F control, Simple magnetic
flux vector control)
Change Pr. 14 Load pattern selection according to the load
characteristic. (V/F control)
Reduce the load weight.
Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in
frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC).)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
86
99
162,
164
59
72
86
88
—
89
—
During PID control, output frequency is automatically controlled to make measured value = set point.
Check
points
Input
signal
Possible Cause
Operation is being performed (signal STF or STR is
ON).
You are attempting to set the parameter in the External
operation mode.
Parameter
Setting
Parameter is disabled by the Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection setting.
Key lock is activated by the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key
lock operation selection setting.
Operation mode and a writing device do not
correspond.
Attempted to set "25" in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection
under IPM motor control. Attempted to perform IPM
motor control while Pr.72 ="25."
Countermeasures
Stop the operation.
When Pr. 77 = "0" (initial value), write is enabled only
during a stop.
Choose the PU operation mode.
Or, set Pr. 77 = "2" to enable parameter write regardless
of the operation mode.
Check Pr. 77 Parameter write selection setting.
Check Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection
setting.
Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select
an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
Pr.72 cannot be set to "25" during the IPM motor control.
(The sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used
under IPM motor control.)
Refer
to
page
96
96
96
103
77, 108
95
6.6.14 Power lamp is not lit
Check
points
Main
Circuit,
Control
Circuit
Possible Cause
Countermeasures
Refer
to
page
Check for the wiring and the installation.
Wiring or installation is improper.
Power lamp is lit when power supply is input to the
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.6.13 Unable to write parameter setting
11
control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21).
139
6
Inspection item
7 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent
any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust,
dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
 Precautions for maintenance and inspection
For some short time after the power is switched OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When
accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and
then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/ of the inverter is not more than 30VDC
using a tester, etc.
7.1 Inspection item
7.1.1
Daily inspection
Basically, check for the following faults during operation.
(1) Motor operation fault
(2) Improper installation environment
(3) Cooling system fault
(4) Unusual vibration and noise
(5) Unusual overheat and discoloration
7.1.2
Periodic inspection
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
1) Check for cooling system fault .............. Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Tightening check and retightening ........ The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc.
Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque.
(Refer to page 14, 15.)
3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
4) Measure insulation resistance.
5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.
140
Inspection item
General Overall unit
Check the surrounding air temperature, humidity,
dirt, corrosive gas, oil mist , etc

Check for unusual vibration and noise

Check for dirt, oil, and other foreign material. *3
Check that the main circuit voltages and control
voltages are normal *1
(1)Check with megger (across main circuit
terminals and earth (ground) terminal).
(2)Check for loose screws and bolts.
General
(3)Check for overheat traces on parts.
(4)Check for stains
(1)Check conductors for distortion.
Conductors, cables (2)Check cable sheaths for breakage and
deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.)
Check for unusual odors and abnormal increase
Transformer/reactor
in whining sound.
Power supply
voltage
Main
circuit
*2

Contact the manufacturer




Retighten
Contact the manufacturer
Clean
Contact the manufacturer

Contact the manufacturer
Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.

Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer
Contact the manufacturer
(1)Check for liquid leakage.
(2)Check for safety valve projection and bulge.
(3)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
main circuit capacitor (Refer to page 142)
Check that the operation is normal and no chatter
is heard.
(1)Check that the output voltages across phases
with the inverter operated alone is balanced
(2)Check that no fault is found in protective and
display circuits in a sequence protective
operation test.


(1)Check for unusual odors and discoloration.

(2)Check for serious rust development
(1)Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and
deformation trace
(2)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
control circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 142.)
(1)Check for unusual vibration and noise.

Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer

Contact the manufacturer
Parts check
Overall
Aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor
Cooling fan
Display
*3
Inspect the power supply
Smoothing
aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor
Indication
*1
*2


Heatsink
Load
motor

Check alarm location and
retighten
Clean
Check for damage.
Operation check
Cooling
system
Improve environment
Terminal block
Relay/contactor
Control
circuit
protective
circuit
Corrective Action at
Alarm Occurrence


Contact the manufacturer

Contact the manufacturer

Contact the manufacturer


(2)Check for loose screws and bolts

(3)Check for stains
(1)Check for clogging
(2)Check for stains
(1)Check that display is normal.
(2)Check for stains





Meter
Check that reading is normal

Operation check
Check for vibration and abnormal increase in
operation noise

Replace the fan
Fix with the fan cover fixing
screws
Clean
Clean
Clean
Contact the manufacturer
Clean
Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter.
One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
Oil component of the heat dissipation grease used inside the inverter may leak out. The oil component, however, is not flammable, corrosive,nor
conductive and is not harmful to humans. Wipe off such oil component with a cloth, etc.
CAUTION
Continuous use of a leaked, deformed, or degraded smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor (as shown in the table above) may
lead to a burst, breakage or fire. Replace such capacitor without delay.
141
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Surrounding
environment
Inspection Item
Periodic
Inspection Item
Daily
Interval
Customer's
Check
Daily and periodic inspection
Area of
Inspection
7.1.3
7
Inspection item
7.1.4
Display of the life of the inverter parts
The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, each parts of the
inrush current limit circuit is near its end. It gives an indication of replacement time .
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement.
Parts
Judgement level
Main circuit capacitor
Control circuit capacitor
Inrush current limit circuit
Cooling fan
85% of the initial capacity
Estimated 10% life remaining
Estimated 10% life remaining (Power ON: 100,000 times left)
Less than 50% of the predetermined speed
For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method of (2) is
not performed. (Refer to page 143.)
(1) Display of the life alarm
· Pr. 255 Life alarm status display can be used to confirm that the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor,
cooling fan, and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level.
bit 15
7
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
• Pr.255 read
• Pr.255 setting read
bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life
Bit image is displayed
in decimal
bit2 Cooling fan life
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life
Pr. 255
(decimal)
Bit
(binary)
15
1111
14
1110
13
1101
12
1100
11
1011
10
1010
9
1001
8
1000
7
0111
6
0110
5
0101
4
0100
3
0011
2
0010
1
0
0001
0000
Inrush Current
Limit Circuit Life
Cooling
Fan Life
Main Circuit
Capacitor Life
Control Circuit
Capacitor Life
: with alarm,
: without alarm
POINT
Life check of the main circuit capacitor needs to be done by Pr. 259. (Refer to page 143.)
142
Inspection item
(2) Measuring method of life of the main circuit capacitor
· If the value of capacitor capacity measured before shipment is considered as 100%, Pr. 255 bit1 is turned ON when
the measured value falls below 85%.
· Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the
capacitor capacity.
1) Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.
2) Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259
3) Switch power OFF. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity when the
inverter turns OFF.
4) After confirming that the LED of the operation panel is OFF, power ON again.
5) Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, then read Pr. 258 and check the life of the main circuit
capacitor.
REMARKS
·
When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr. 259 = "8") or "measuring error"
(Pr. 259 = "9") occurs or it remains in "measuring start" (Pr. 259 = "1").
When measuring, avoid the following conditions to perform. In addition, even when "measurement completion" (Pr. 259 = "3") is
confirmed under the following conditions, normal measurement cannot be done.
(a)FR-HC2, MT-HC, FR-CV, MT-RC or sine wave filter is connected.
(b)Terminal R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to the terminals P/ and N/.
(c)Switch power ON during measuring.
(d)The motor is not connected to the inverter.
(e)The motor is running.(The motor is coasting.)
(f)The motor capacity is two rank smaller as compared to the inverter capacity.
(g)The inverter is at an alarm stop or an alarm occurred while power is OFF.
(h)The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
(i)The start command is given while measuring.
· Operating environment:Surrounding air temperature (annual average 40C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist,
dust and dirt))
Output current (80% of the rated inverter current)
For the accurate life measuring of the main circuit capacitor, perform after more than 3h passed since the turn OFF
of the power as it is affected by the capacitor temperature.
WARNING
When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC voltage is
applied to the motor for 1s at powering OFF. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering OFF to prevent
an electric shock.
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
POINT
7
143
Inspection item
7.1.5
Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean status.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
CAUTION
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
The display, etc. of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and
alcohol. Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.
7.1.6
Replacement of parts
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced
performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
*1
*2
Part Name
Estimated lifespan *1
Description
Cooling fan
Main circuit smoothing capacitor
On-board smoothing capacitor
10 years
10 years *2
10 years *2
Replace (as required)
Replace (as required)
Replace the board (as required)
Relays

as required
Fuse (185K or higher)
10 years
Replace the fuse (as required)
Estimated lifespan for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40°C
(without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc)
Output current : 80% of the rated inverter current
CAUTION
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
144
Inspection item
(1) Cooling fan
The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit
semiconductor is greatly affected by the surrounding air temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed
during inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
Removal (FR-F720P-2.2K to 110K, FR-F740P-3.7K to 160K)
1) Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740P-3.7K, 5.5K
FR-F720P-7.5K to 30K
FR-F740P-7.5K to 30K
FR-F720P-37K or higher
FR-F740P-37K to 160K
2) Disconnect the fan connectors.
3) Remove the fan.
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740P-3.7K, 5.5K
Fan *
Fan connection
connector
FR-F720P-7.5K to 30K
FR-F740P-7.5K to 30K
Fan *
Fan connection
connector
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Fan connection
connector
FR-F720P-37K or higher
FR-F740P-37K to 160K
* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.
7
145
Inspection item
Reinstallation (FR-F720P-2.2K to 110K, FR-F740P-3.7K to 160K)
1)After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
AIR FLOW
<Fan side face>
2)Reconnect the fan connectors.
FR-F720P-7.5K to 15K
FR-F740P-7.5K to 18.5K
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740P-3.7K, 5.5K
FR-F720P-18.5K, 22K
FR-F740P-22K, 30K
FR-F720P-30K
FR-F720P-37K to 110K
FR-F740P-37K to 160K
3) Reinstall the fan cover.
2. Insert hooks until
you hear a click 1. Insert hooks into
sound.
holes.
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740P-3.7K, 5.5K
1. Insert hooks into
2. Insert hooks until
holes.
you hear a click
sound.
FR-F720P-7.5K to 30K
FR-F740P-7.5K to 30K
1. Insert hooks into
holes.
2. Insert hooks until
you hear a click
sound.
FR-F720P-37K or higher
FR-F740P-37K to 160K
CAUTION
Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
When installing the fan, use care to prevent wires from being caught between the inverter and fan.
 Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power OFF,
replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.
146
Inspection item
Removal (FR-F740P-185K or higher)
1) Remove a fan cover.
2) After removing a fan connector, remove a fan block.
3) Remove a fan. (Make sure to remove the fan cable from the clamp of the fan block beforehand.)
Fan *
3)
Fan connection
connector
Fan block
2)
Fan cover
1)
Unlock the clamp, and pull
out the cable.
Reinstallation (FR-F740P-185K or higher)
1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces
up.
AIR FLOW
<Fan side face>
2) Install fans referring to the above figure.
CAUTION
• Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
• When installing the fan, use care to prevent wires from being caught between the inverter and fan.
• Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after
power OFF, replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.
(2) Replacement procedure of the cooling fan when using a heatsink protrusion attachment
(FR-A7CN)
When replacing a cooling fan, remove a top cover of the
heatsink protrusion attachment and perform replacement.
After replacing the cooling fan, replace the top cover in the
original position.
Top cover
Inverter
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.
7
147
Inspection item
(3) Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum
electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated
by the adverse effects of ripple currents, etc.
The replacement intervals greatly vary with the surrounding air temperature and operating conditions. When the
inverter is operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors about every 10 years.
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion
2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
3) Check for external crack, discoloration, fluid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the
measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.
Refer to page 144 to perform the life check of the main circuit capacitor.
(4) Relays
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times
(switching life).
(5) Fuse inside the inverter (185K or higher)
A fuse is used inside the inverter. Surrounding air temperature and operating condition affect the life of fuses. When the
inverter is used in a normal air-conditioned environment, replace its fuse after about 10 years.
7.1.7
Inverter replacement
The inverter can be replaced with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the wiring
cover of the inverter.
1) Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2) Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
CAUTION
Before starting inverter replacement, switch power OFF, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check the voltage with a tester and
such to ensure safety.
148
Rating
8 SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Rating
200V class
Type FR-F720P-K
Rated current (A)*3
0.75
1.5
0.75
1.6
4.2
(3.6)
1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
11
15 18.5 22
30
37
45
2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 11.8 17.1 22.1 27
32
43
53
65
7.0 9.6 15.2 23
31
45
58 70.5 85 114 140 170
(6.0) (8.2) (13) (20) (26) (38) (49) (60) (72) (97) (119) (145)
120% for 60s, 150% for 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 200 to 240V
Overload current rating*4
Rated voltage*5
Rated input AC voltage/
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power supply
system capacity
(kVA)*6
Without
DC reactor
With DC
reactor
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
55
75
90
81 110 132
212 288 346
(180) (244) (294)
110
110
165
432
(367)
Three-phase 200 to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz
170 to 242V 50Hz, 170 to 264V 60Hz
±5%
2.1
4.0
4.8
8.0
11.5
16
20
27
32
41
52
65
79
99
—
—
—
1.2
2.6
3.3
5.0
8.1
10
16
19
24
31
41
50
61
74
110
132
165
70
70
Protective structure (JEM 1030)*8
Enclosed type (IP20) *7
Cooling system
Self-cooling
Approx. mass (kg)
1.8
2.2 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.5 6.5
*1
15
Open type (IP00)
Forced air cooling
7.8
13
13
14
23
35
35
67
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor. To use a dedicated
IPM motor, refer to page 162、164.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V.
When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency set to 3kHz or more, the carrier frequency automatically decreases if the inverter output
current exceeds the value in parentheses of the rated current. This may cause the motor noise to increase.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty,
allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, protective structure of the inverter changes to an open type
(IP00).
FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply
Output
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
Rated capacity (kVA)*2
8
149
Rating
400V class
Type FR-F740P-K
Output
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
Rated capacity (kVA)*2
Rated current (A)*3
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
0.75
1.6
2.1
(1.8)
1.5
2.7
3.5
(3.0)
2.2
3.7
4.8
(4.1)
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
5.8
8.8
12.2 17.5 22.1 26.7 32.8 43.4
7.6
11.5
16
23
29
35
43
57
(6.4) (9.8) (13)
(19)
(24)
(30)
(36)
(48)
120% 60s, 150% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 380 to 480V
Power supply
Overload current rating*4
Rated voltage*5
Rated input AC voltage/
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power supply
system capacity
(kVA)*6
Without
DC reactor
With DC
reactor
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *8
Cooling system
Approx. mass (kg)
2.1
4.0
4.8
8.0
1.2
2.6
3.3
5.0
3.5
Self-cooling
3.5
3.5
3.5
110
132
90
137
180
(153)
110
165
216
(183)
132
198
260
(221)
Output
90
Overload current rating*4
Rated voltage*5
Rated input AC voltage/
frequency
Permissible AC voltage
fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power supply
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
37
53.3
70
(60)
45
64.8
85
(72)
55
80.8
106
(90)
11.5
16
20
27
32
41
52
65
79
99
8.1
10
16
19
24
31
41
50
61
74
Open type (IP00)
Enclosed type (IP20) *7
75
110
144
(122)
Protective structure (JEM 1030)*8
Cooling system
Approx. mass (kg)
15
±5%
75
Power supply
system capacity
(kVA)*6
11
323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
Type FR-F740P-K
Without
DC reactor
With DC
reactor
7.5
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
Rated capacity (kVA)*2
Rated current (A)*3
5.5
3.5
160
6.5
185
Forced air cooling
7.5
7.5
13
6.5
220
250
280
315
355
160 185 220 250 280 315 355
247 275 329 366 416 464 520
325
361
432
481
547
610
683
(276) (306) (367) (408) (464) (518) (580)
120% 60s, 150% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 380 to 480V
13
23
35
35
400
450
500
560
400
586
770
(654)
450
659
866
(736)
500
733
962
(817)
560
833
1094
(929)
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
±5%
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
110
137
165
198
247
275
329
366
416
464
520
586
659
733
833
110
Open type (IP00)
Forced air cooling
110
175 175
175
260
260
370
370
370
37
50
57
67
72
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor. To use a dedicated
IPM motor, refer to page 162、164.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency set to 3kHz or more, the carrier frequency automatically decreases if the inverter output
current exceeds the value in parentheses of the rated current. This may cause the motor noise to increase.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty,
allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, protective structure of the inverter changes to an open type
(IP00).
FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
150
Common specifications
8.2 Common specifications
Control method
Output frequency range
Control specifications
Frequency
setting
resolution
Analog input
Digital input
Analog input
Frequency
accuracy
Digital input
Speed control range
Voltage/frequency
characteristics
Starting
torque
General-purpose
motor control
IPM motor control
High carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control)/Optimum excitation control/Simple magnetic flux vector
control/IPM motor control
0.5 to 400Hz
0.015Hz/60Hz (terminal 2 and 4: 0 to 10V/12-bit)
0.03Hz/60Hz (terminal 2 and 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/approx.11-bit, terminal 1: 0 to 10V/12-bit)
0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to 5V/11-bit)
0.01Hz
Within 0.2% of the maximum output frequency (25°C 10°C)
Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
1:10 under V/F control, 1:15 under Simple magnetic flux vector control, 1:10 under IPM motor control
Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz. Constant-torque/variable-torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/
F can be selected.
Under Simple magnetic flux vector control and slip compensation: 120% (at 3Hz)
50%
0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration modes are available.
General-purpose motor control: Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation
DC injection brake
voltage (0 to 30%) can be changed.
Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 150% variable). Whether to use the function or not can be set.
Terminal 2 and 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, and 4 to 20mA are available.
Analog input
Terminal 1: -10 to +10V and -5 to 5V are available.
Frequency
setting signal
4-digit BCD or 16-bit binary using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit (when used with
Digital input
the option FR-A7AX)
Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Start signal
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection): multi-speed
selection, remote setting, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection,
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter run
enable signal (FR-HC2/FR-CV connection), FR-HC2 connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU
Input signals (twelve terminals) operation external interlock signal, PID control enable terminal, PU-External operation switchover, output
stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PTC
thermistor input, PID forward/reverse action switchover, PU/NET operation switchover, External/NET
operation switchover, command source switchover, DC feeding operation permission, DC feeding cancel,
and PID integral value reset.
Maximum and minimum frequency settings, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection,
polarity reversible operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, original operation
continuation at an instantaneous power failure, electronic bypass operation, forward/reverse rotation
Operational functions
prevention, remote setting, second and third function, multi-speed setting, regenerative avoidance, slip
compensation, operation mode selection, PID control, and computer link operation (RS-485)
The following signals can be assigned to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection): inverter running,
Output signal
up to frequency, instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency detection,
Open collector output (five
second output frequency detection, regenerative brake prealarm*1, electronic thermal relay function preterminals)
alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID
Relay output (two terminals)
lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, electronic bypass MC1*2, electronic bypass
MC2*2, electronic bypass MC3*2, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm, inverter running start
command is ON, during deceleration at occurrence of power failure, during PID control activated, PID
deviation limit, IPM motor control*6, during retry, PID output interruption, pulse train output of output power,
Operating status
DC feeding, life alarm, fault output 3 (power-off signal), energy saving average value updated timing, current
average value monitor, fault output 2, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, alarm output, and fault output.
Fault code of the inverter can be output (4-bit) from the open collector.
When used with In addition to above, the following signals can be assigned to Pr.313 to Pr.319 (extension output terminal function
the FR-A7AY, FR- selection): control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, and inrush current limit circuit
life. (Only positive logic can be set to the extension terminals of FR-A7AR.)
A7AR (option)
Indication
For meter
Pulse train output
(Max. 2.4kHz: one terminal)
Analog output
(Max. 10VDC: one terminal)
Operation
panel
(FR-DU07)
Operating status
Parameter
unit
(FR-PU07)
Fault record
Interactive
guidance
The following signals can be assigned to Pr.54 FM terminal function selection(pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM
terminal function selection (analog output): output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output
voltage, frequency setting value, running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic
thermal relay load factor, input power, output power, load meter, reference voltage output, motor load factor,
energy saving effect, regenerative brake duty*1, PID set point, and PID measured value.
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, fault display, frequency setting value,
running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay load factor, input
power, output power, load meter, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor,
cumulative power, energy saving effect, cumulative energy savings, regenerative brake duty*1, PID set point,
PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor*3, output
terminal option monitor*3, option fitting status monitor*4, and terminal assignment status*4.
Fault record is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault records (output voltage/current/frequency/
cumulative energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored.
Function (help) for operation guide and troubleshooting*4
SPECIFICATIONS
Operation specifications
Acceleration/deceleration time
setting
8
151
Common specifications
Environment
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration/stop,
overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration/stop,
inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous
power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase loss*5, stall prevention stop, output side earth (ground)
Protective
fault overcurrent, output short circuit, output phase loss, external thermal relay operation*5, PTC thermistor
operation*5, option fault, parameter error, PU disconnection*5, retry count excess*5, CPU fault, operation
function
Protective/
panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess*5,
warning function
inrush current limit circuit fault, communication fault (inverter), analog input fault, PID signal fault*5, internal
circuit fault (15V power supply), brake transistor alarm detection*1, loss of synchronism detection*6,
overspeed occurrence*5*6.
Fan alarm, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake prealarm*5,
Warning function electronic thermal relay function prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm*3*5, parameter write error, copy
operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy warning, password locked *5
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Surrounding air temperature
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Ambient humidity
-20°C to 65°C
Storage temperature*7
Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Atmosphere
Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s 2 or less *8 at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Altitude/vibration
*1 This function is only available for 75K or higher.
*5 This protective function is not available in the initial status.
*2 This function is only available under general-purpose motor control. *6 This function is available only when an IPM motor is connected.
*7 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
*3 This can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07).
*4 This can be displayed only on the option parameter unit (FR-PU07). *8 2.9m/s2 or less for 185K or higher.
152
Outline dimension drawings
8.3 Outline dimension drawings
8.3.1
Inverter outline dimension drawings
7.5
FR-F720P-0.75K, 1.5K
245
260
2-φ6 hole
95
110
5
7.5
6
D
D1
Inverter Model
FR-F720P-0.75K
FR-F720P-1.5K
D
D1
110
125
21
36
(Unit: mm)
7.5
 FR-F720P-2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K
 FR-F740P-0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K
*
140
5
* The FR-F740P-0.75K to 2.2K are
not provided with cooling fans.
144
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
125
150
45.5
6
7.5
245
260
2-φ6 hole
8
153
Outline dimension drawings
7.5
 FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K, 15K
 FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K, 15K, 18.5K
6
H
7.5
H1
2-φ6 hole
195
D
10
220
Inverter Model
H
H1
D
D1
260
245
170
84
300
285
190
101.5
D1
FR-F720P-7.5K, 11K
FR-F740P-7.5K, 11K
FR-F720P-15K
FR-F740P-15K, 18.5K
(Unit: mm)
211
10
 FR-F720P-18.5K, 22K, 30K
 FR-F740P-22K, 30K
10
380
400
2-φ10 hole
10
230
250
10.5
101.5
190
* The FR-F720P-30K is
not provided with a
wiring cover.
250
(Unit: mm)
154
Outline dimension drawings
 FR-F720P-37K, 45K, 55K
 FR-F740P-37K, 45K, 55K
10
H1
550
H2
2-φd hole
W2
3.2
W1
W
Inverter Model
FR-F720P-37K
FR-F740P-37K
FR-F720P-45K, 55K
FR-F740P-45K, 55K
D
W
W1
W2
H1
H2
d
D
325
270
10
530
10
10
195
435
380
12
525
15
12
250
(Unit: mm)
 FR-F740P-75K, 90K
 DC reactor supplied
15
2-φ12 hole
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
P1
P
H1
H1
H
H 10
P1, P
E
W1
10
W
12
Within D
D
DC reactor
Model
W
W1
H
H1
D
435
465
380
400
550
620
525
595
250
300
W
W1
H
H1
D
Mass
(kg)
FR-HEL-H75K
140 120 320 295 185
(FR-F740P-75K)
16
FR-HEL-H90K
150 130 340 310 190
(FR-F740P-90K)
20
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
FR-F740P-75K
FR-F740P-90K
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
3.2
W1
W
Inverter Model
2
8
155
Outline dimension drawings
 FR-F740P-110K
 DC reactor supplied
15
2-φ12 hole
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
10
10
310
340
P1
620
595
P1
P
P
E
130
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
150
Within 195
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
465
Mass
(kg)
DC reactor Model
3.2
10
400
FR-HEL-H110K(FR-F740P-110K)
300
22
(Unit: mm)
15
 FR-F720P-75K, 90K, 110K
 FR-F740P-132K, 160K
2-φ12 hole
 DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
715
740
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
P1
H 10
H1 10
P1
P
P
400
465
10
E
W1
3.2
360
W
2
4-installation hole
(for S screw)
Within D
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-75K(FR-F720P-75K)
FR-HEL-90K(FR-F720P-90K)
FR-HEL-110K(FR-F720P-110K)
FR-HEL-H132K(FR-F740P-132K)
FR-HEL-H160K(FR-F740P-160K)
W
W1
H
H1
D
S
Mass
(kg)
150
150
175
175
175
130
130
150
150
150
340
340
400
405
405
310
310
365
370
370
190
200
200
200
205
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
17
19
20
26
28
(Unit: mm)
156
Outline dimension drawings
 FR-F740P-185K, 220K
985
1010
15
3-φ12 hole
200
200
3.2
10
12
49
49
380
498
185
214.5
148.5
450
 DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-M6 eye nut (only for FR-HEL-H220K)
2-terminal (for M12 bolt)
P1
370 10
405 10
P1
P
P
E
150
1
175
2
4-installation hole
(for M8 screw)
Within 240
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H185K (FR-F740P-185K)
FR-HEL-H220K (FR-F740P-220K)
Mass
(kg)
29
30
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
8
157
Outline dimension drawings
 FR-F740P-250K, 280K, 315K
1010
984
3-φ12 holes
3.2
12
300
380
300
148
680
N/-
S/L2
P/+
V
R/L1
T/L3
U
W
185
214
P1
 DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal (for bolt)
P1
H 10
H1 10
P1
P
P
E
W1
W
1
4-installation hole
(for S screw)
2
Within D
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H250K(FR-F740P-250K)
FR-HEL-H280K(FR-F740P-280K)
FR-HEL-H315K(FR-F740P-315K)
W
W1
H
H1
D
S

Mass
(kg)
190
190
210
165
165
185
440
440
495
400
400
450
250
255
250
M8
M8
M10
M12
M16
M16
35
38
42
(Unit: mm)
158
Outline dimension drawings
 FR-F740P-355K, 400K
1330
1300
3-φ12 hole
12
315
315
4.5
790
T/L3
P1
N/-
U
P/+
W
V
185
222
S/L2
194
R/L1
4.5
440
 DC reactor supplied
 DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal
4- 15 hole
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal (for M16 bolt)
P1
P
10
10
40
40
P
E
P
75
P
455
495 10
450 10
P1
500
P1
P1
E
185
210
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
Within 250
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
195
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
220
Within 250
Within 235
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H355K (FR-F740P-355K)
46
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H400K (FR-F740P-400K)
Mass
(kg)
50
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
Mass
(kg)
8
159
Outline dimension drawings
 FR-F740P-450K, 500K, 560K
1580
1550
4-φ12 hole
4.5
12
300
300
300
4.5
440
P1
P/+
U
V
W
185
227
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
189
995
950
 DC reactor supplied
 DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
Rating plate
40
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal
4- 15 hole
P1
P1
10
10
455
500
P1
2-terminal
4- 15 hole
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M12 screw)
P
E
40
75
Within 245
75
40
P
* Remove the eye nut after
installation of the product.
P
2-M12 eye nut
40
P1
P
E
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
220
Within 270
Within H
195
Within 240
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H450K(FR-F740P-450K)
Mass
(kg)
150
215
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
D1
10
D
10
57
DC reactor Model
H
D
D1
Mass
(kg)
FR-HEL-H500K (FR-F740P-500K)
FR-HEL-H560K (FR-F740P-560K)
345
360
455
460
405
410
67
85
(Unit: mm)
160
Outline dimension drawings
 Operation panel (FR-DU07)
<Outline drawing>
<Panel cutting dimension drawing>
Panel
FR-DU07
Parameter unit connection
cable (FR-CB2
)
(option)
27.8
21
Airbleeding
hole
22
44
50
44
6
3
3.2max
120 or more *
3
20
3
72
78
81
2-M3 screw
16
3
72
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP option)
25
* Denotes the space required to connect an optional
parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2). When
using another cable, leave the space required for the
cable specification.
(Unit: mm)
 Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)
<Outline drawing>
<Panel cutting dimension drawing>
25.05
(14.2)
(11.45)
2.5
83
*1
40
Air-bleeding
hole
51
50
*1
40
4-R1
*1
57.8
56.8
67
135
*1
26.5
26.5
4-φ4 hole
(Effective depth of
the installation
screws hole 5.0)
M3 screw *2
80.3
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
*1 When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for
fixing the FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with
M3 nuts.
*2 Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective
depth of the installation screw hole.
8
161
Specification of premium high-efficiency IPM
motor [MM-EFS (1500r/min) series]
8.4 Specification of premium high-efficiency IPM motor
[MM-EFS (1500r/min) series]
Motor specification
Motor
model
200V class
MM-EFS1M
400V class
MM-EFS1M4
200V class
FR-F720P-K
400V class
FR-F740P-K
7
15
22
37
55
75
11K
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
Continuous Rated output (kW) 0.75 1.5
characteristic
Rated torque (Nm) 4.77 9.55
*1
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
14
23.6
35
47.7
70
95.5
118
140
191
236
286
350
Compatible
inverter
Rated speed (r/min)
Maximum speed (r/min)
Number of poles
Maximum torque
Frame number
15K 18K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K
1500
2250
6
80M
90L
8
120% 60s
100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L
180M
180L
200L
225S
40
55
110 275 280
760 770 1700 1700 1900 3400 3850 6500
Moment of inertia (10-4kgm2) 20
3
6.0
8.2 13.4
20
27
40
54
66
79
110 128 157 194
200V class
Rated
current (A)
1.5
3.0
4.1
6.7
10
13.5
20
27
33 39.5 55
64 78.5 97
400V class
Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor. With steel framed legs. (protective structure IP44 *2)
Structure
F class
Insulation class
V-15
Vibration class
Surrounding air
-10°C to +40°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
temperature and
humidity
Storage temperature
-20°C to +70°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Environment
and humidity
Indoors (not under direct sunlight), and free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt.
Atmosphere
Maximum 1,000m above sea level
Altitude
Vibration
4.9m/s2
11
15
22
31
50
53
95
100
135
155 215 230 285
Mass(kg)
*1
*2
The above characteristics apply when the rated AC voltage is input from the inverter. (Refer to page 149.)
Output and rated motor speed are not guaranteed when the power supply voltage drops.
This excludes the part where the axis passes through.
Motor torque characteristic
The following figure shows the torque characteristic of the premium high-efficiency IPM motor [MM-EFS (1500r/min)
series] when used with an inverter.
140
Short time (60s) maximum torque
Torque[%]
120
83.3%
(100% reference torque at 1800r/min rating)
100
80
60
Continuous operation
torque
40
80%
66.7%
20
0
0
150
300 500
900 1200 1500 1800
2100
2250
Speed [r/min]
REMARKS
· The motor can also be used for applications which require the rated speed of 1800r/min.
CAUTION
 The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20°C, and the input voltage to the inverter is 200VAC or
400VAC.
 Constant-speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 150r/min or less.
162
Specification of premium high-efficiency IPM
motor [MM-THE4 (1500r/min) series]
8.5 Specification of premium high-efficiency IPM motor
[MM-THE4 (1500r/min) series]
Motor specification
Motor type
Voltage class
MM-THE4
200V
FR-F720P-K
Applicable inverter
75
75
477
Rated output (kW)
Continuous
characteristic *1
Rated torque (Nm)
Rated speed (r/min)
Maximum speed (r/min)
Number of poles
Maximum torque
Frame number
400V
FR-F740P-K
75
75
477
250MA
250MA
90
90
573
110
110
700
1500
1800
6
120% 60s
250MD
132
132
840
160
160
1018
280MD
6000
6000
10000
17500
20500
23250
Moment of inertia (10-4kgm2)
270
135
170
195
230
280
Rated current (A)
Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor. With molded frame legs. (protective structure IP44)
Structure
F class
Insulation class
V-25
Vibration class
Surrounding air temperature
-10°C to +40°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
and humidity
Storage temperature and
-20°C to +70°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Environment
Indoors (not under direct sunlight), and free from corrosive gas,
Atmosphere
flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt.
Maximum 1,000m above sea level
Altitude
Vibration
Mass (kg)
*1
470
470
4.9m/s2
610
780
810
860
Output and rated motor speed are not guaranteed when the power supply voltage drops.
Motor torque characteristic
The following figure shows the torque characteristic of a premium high-efficiency IPM motor [MM-THE4 (1500r/min)
series] when used with an inverter.
140
Short-time (60s) maximum torque
Torque[%]
120
100
80
60
Continuous operation
torque
40
20
0
0
150
300 500
900 1200 1500 1800
Speed [r/min]
REMARKS
 The motor can also be used for applications where the rated speed is 1800r/min.
CAUTION
SPECIFICATIONS
 The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20°C, and the input voltage to the inverter is 200V AC or
400V AC.
 Constant-speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 150r/min or less.
8
163
Specification of high-efficiency IPM
motor [MM-EF (1800r/min) series]
8.6 Specification of high-efficiency IPM motor
[MM-EF (1800r/min) series]
Motor specification
200V class
MM-EF2
400V class
MM-EF24
200V class
FR-F720P-K
400V class
FR-F740P-K
Motor
model
Compatible
inverter
—
4
7
15
22
37
55
75
90K 110K
0.75 0.75 1.5
2.2
Continuous Rated output (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
characteristic
Rated torque (Nm) 2.12 3.98 7.96 11.7
*1
3.7
5.5
3.7
7.5
5.5
19.6
11
7.5
11
1800 (90Hz)
Maximum speed (r/min)
2700 (135Hz)
Number of poles
Maximum torque
Frame number
6
80M
15
15
18.5
18.5
22
30
22
30
37
37
45
45
55
—
—
90
110
90
110
75
55
75
29.2 39.8 58.4 79.6 98.1 117 159 196 239 292 398 477 584
Rated speed (r/min)
-4
—
11K 15K 18K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K
90L 100L
1800 (120Hz)
2700 (180Hz)
2400
(160Hz)
8
120% 60s
132S
160M
112M
160L
180L
200L
225S
2
Environment
815
1050 2215 2400 4300 5200 8700 9500
Moment of inertia (10 kgm ) 10.4 10.4 18.4 36.9 51.2 125 153 274 354
200V class
1.6 3.0 5.9 8.7 14.4 22 29 43 55 70.5 83.5 109 136 162 195 272 —
—
Rated
current (A)
400V class
0.8 1.5 3.0 4.4 7.2 11 14.5 21.5 27.5 35 42 57 68 81 96.5 136 160 197
Structure
Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor (protective structure IP44 *2)
Insulation class
B class
F class
Surrounding air
temperature and
-10°C to +40°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Storage
temperature and
-20°C to +70°C (non-freezing) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Atmosphere
Indoors (not under direct sunlight), and free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt.
Altitude
Maximum 1,000m above sea level
4.9m/s2(0.5G)
52 60 105 105 119 167 178 240 290 360 390
Vibration
Mass(kg)
*1
*2
8.5
9.0
11
15
23
33
38
The above characteristics apply when the rated AC voltage is input from the inverter. (Refer to page 149.)
Output and rated motor speed are not guaranteed when the power supply voltage drops.
This excludes the part where the axis passes through.
Motor torque characteristic
The following figures show the torque characteristics of high-efficiency IPM motors [MM-EF (1800r/min) series] when
used with inverters.
75K or lower
90K or higher
140
140
120
Short time(60s) maximum
torque
100
80
60
Continuous operation
torque
40
Short time(60s) maximum
torque
100
80%
66.7%
Torque[%]
Torque[%]
120
80
60
90%
75%
Continuous operation
torque
40
20
20
0
0
180
0
300
600
900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700
Speed [r/min]
0
180
300 600
900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400
Speed[r/min]
CAUTION
 The torque characteristic is when the armature winding temperature is 20°C, and the input voltage to the inverter is 200VAC or
400VAC.
 Constant-speed operation cannot be performed for the speed of 180r/min or less.
164
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
8.7 Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
When encasing the inverter in an enclosure, the generated heat amount in an enclosure can be greatly reduced by
installing the heatsink portion of the inverter outside the enclosure. When installing the inverter in a compact enclosure,
etc., this installation method is recommended.
8.7.1
When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)
For the FR-F720P-2.2K to 110K, FR-F740P-0.75K to 160K, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure using a
heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN). (Attachment is not required when protruding the heatsink for 185K or
higher.) For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the heatsink protrusion attachment (FRA7CN) to the inverter, refer to a manual of "heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)".
8.7.2
Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-F740P-185K or higher
(1) Panel cutting
Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity.
 FR-F740P-185K, 220K
 FR-F740P-250K, 280K, 315K
6-M10 screw
6-M10 screw
15
200
984
Hole
300
954
954
200
662
300
Hole
15
18
985
13
484
(Unit: mm)
 FR-F740P-355K, 400K
(Unit: mm)
 FR-F740P-450K, 500K, 560K
6-M10 screw
976
21
771
315
300
8-M10 screw
300
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
1508
1550
Hole
21
1258
Hole
21
1300
21
315
300
8
165
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
(2) Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame
 FR-F740P-185K to 315K
Shift
One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lower
part of the inverter. Change the position of the rear side installation frame on the upper and lower side of the inverter to the front
side as shown on the right. When changing the installation
frames, make sure that the installation orientation is correct.
Upper
installation
frame
Lower
installation
frame
Shift
 FR-F740P-355K or higher
Removal
Two installation frames each are attached to the upper and lower
parts of the inverter. Remove the rear side installation frame on
the upper and lower side of the inverter as shown on the right.
Upper installation
frame (rear side)
Lower installation
frame (rear side)
Removal
(3) Installation of the inverter
Push the inverter heatsink portion outside the enclosure and fix the enclosure and inverter with upper and lower installation frame.
Enclosure
Inside the
enclosure Exhausted air
*
* For the FR-F740P-185K or higher, there are finger
guards behind the enclosure. Therefore, the
thickness of the panel should be less than 10mm(*1)
and also do not place anything around finger guards
to avoid contact with the finger guards.
Enclosure
Inverter
10*
1
140
Finger guard
6
Installation
frame
(Unit: mm)
Inverter Model
Dimension of
Cooling
wind the outside of
the enclosure
D1
FR-F740P-185K, 220K
FR-F740P-250K to 560K
D1(mm)
185
184
CAUTION
· Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure cannot be used in the environment of water
drops, oil, mist, dust, etc.
· Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section.
166
For customers who are replacing the conventional model with this inverter
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 For customers who are replacing the conventional model
with this inverter
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-F500 series
(1) Instructions for installation
1)Removal procedure of the front cover was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 6.)
2)Removal procedure of the operation panel was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 6.)
3)Plug-in options of the F500 series are not compatible
4)Operation panel (FR-DU04) cannot be used.
5)Setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP) cannot be used.
(2) Wiring instructions
1)The control circuit terminal block can be used for the FR-F700P series without removing wiring.
Note that the wiring cover (0.75K to 22K) is not compatible.
FR-F500 series
FR-F700P series
(Note that the relay output 2 (A2, B2, C2) specific for the FR-F700P series cannot be used with the FR-F500
series terminals.)
(3) Instructions for continuous use of the FR-PU04 (parameter unit)
1) For the FR-F700P series, many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting these parameters, the
parameter name and setting range are not displayed. Parameter list, change list, initial value list, initial value list
2 and parameter clear of the HELP function cannot be used.
2) For the FR-F700P series, many protective functions have been added. These functions activate, but all faults
are displayed as "Fault 14". When the faults history has been checked, "E.14" appears. Added faults display will
not appear on the parameter unit.
3) User initial value setting cannot be used.
4) User registration/clear (user group 2) cannot be used.
5) Parameter copy/verification function cannot be used.
167
For customers who are replacing the conventional model with this inverter
(4) Main differences and compatibilities with the FR-F500(L) series
Item
Simple mode
parameter
FR-F500(L)
61 parameters
FR-F700P
17 parameters
User group 1 (16 parameters), User group 2 (16
parameters) (Pr.160, Pr.173 to Pr.175)
Deleted
function
Changed
initial value
Changed
function
User group (16 parameters) only
Setting methods were partially changed
(Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.173)
Performing the parameter clear or all parameter clear Performing the parameter clear or all parameter clear
(H5A96 or HAA99) from the DeviceNet
Communication (H5A96 or HAA99) from the DeviceNet
communication option (FR-A5ND) clears the Pr. 345 communication option (FR-A7ND) does not clear the
option
Pr. 345 and Pr. 346 settings.
and Pr. 346 settings.
2% for 11K to 37K, 1.5% for 45K and 55K
(If the torque boost setting was being used in the
Pr.0
initial setting in the FR-F500 series, the setting does
2% for 11K to 55K
Torque boost
not need to be changed from the initial setting after
the inverter is replaced with the FR-F700P series. )
User initial
Not available
value setting Available
Substitutable with the copy function of the operation
(Pr.199)
panel (FR-DU07)
Not available
DC injunction With a terminal (X13 signal)
Start in the reverse rotation is possible with the flying
function with (Setting value "8888" for Pr.11, setting value "13" for
start function (frequency search of the automatic
Pr.180 to Pr.186)
terminal
restart after instantaneous power failure function)
Setting is not necessary
Long wire mode Setting values "10 and 11" for Pr.240
(Setting values "10 and 11" for Pr.240 are deleted.)
Not available
Intelligent
For deceleration time, overvoltage fault can be
Available
optimum
avoided with the regeneration avoidance function
acceleration/ (Pr.60 setting "3" and Pr.61 to Pr.63)
(Pr.882 to Pr.885).
deceleration
Automatic
The automatic torque boost is deleted because the
Pr.38, Pr.39
torque boost
Simple magnetic flux vector (Pr.80) has been added.
Removable terminal block
Terminal block
Removable terminal block
Upward compatibility (Terminal block of the F500 can
be mounted)
FR-PU07
FR-DU07
PU
FR-PU04, DU04
FR-DU04 unavailable (Partly restricted when the FRPU04 is used. Refer to page 167.)
Dedicated plug-in option (not compatible)
Computer link, relay output option
Built into the inverter
Plug-in option
FR-A5NR
(RS-485 terminal, relay output 2 points)
Three boards can be mounted
One board can be mounted
FR-F720P-0.75K, 2.2K, 3.7K, 7.5K, 18.5K, 22K, 37K, 45K,
Installation size
FR-F740P-0.75K to 3.7K, 7.5K, 11K, 22K, 37K to 55K are compatible in mounting dimensions
For other capacities, an optional intercompatibility attachment (FR-AAT) is necessary.
User group
Appendix 1-2 Replacement of the FR-A100 <EXCELENT> series
Instructions for installation
• When using the installation holes of the FR-A100(E) series, FR-A5AT (intercompatibility attachment) is necessary.
168
Appendix 2 Instructions for compliance with the EU Directives
The EU Directives are issued to standardize different national regulations of the EU Member States and to facilitate free movement of the
equipment, whose safety is ensured, in the EU territory.
Since 1996, compliance with the EMC Directive that is one of the EU Directives has been legally required. Since 1997, compliance with the
Low Voltage Directive, another EU Directive, has been also legally required. When a manufacturer confirms its equipment to be compliant
with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive, the manufacturer must declare the conformity and affix the CE marking.
 The authorized representative in the EU
The authorized representative in the EU is shown below.
Name: Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.
Address: Gothaer Strasse 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany
 Note
We declare that this inverter conforms with the EMC Directive in industrial environments and affix the CE marking on the inverter. When
using the inverter in a residential area, take appropriate measures and ensure the conformity of the inverter used in the residential area.
(1) EMC Directive
We declare that this inverter conforms with the EMC Directive and affix the CE marking on the inverter.
 EMC Directive: 2004/108/EC
 Standard(s): EN61800-3:2004 (Second environment / PDS Category "C3")
Note: First environment
Environment including residential buildings. Includes buildings directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power
supply network which supplies power to residential buildings.
Second environment
Environment including all buildings except buildings directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power supply
network which supplies power to residential buildings.
 Note
Set the EMC filter valid and install the inverter and perform wiring according to the following instructions.
* The inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter. Set the EMC filter valid. (The EMC filter is invalid when shipped from the factory. (The
FR-F720P-0.75K and 1.5K are always valid.) For details, refer to page 10.)
* Connect the inverter to an earthed power supply.
* Install a motor and a control cable according to the instructions written in the EMC Installation Guidelines (BCN-A21041-204 (For the
manual, please contact your sales representative.) ).
* The cable length between the inverter and the motor is 5 m maximum.
* Confirm that the final integrated system with the inverter conforms with the EMC Directive.
* This inverter does not conform with the EU Directives when used with an IPM motor.
169
(2) Low Voltage Directive
We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage Directive (Conforming standard EN 50178) and affix the CE
mark on the inverters.
Outline of instructions
* Do not use an earth leakage current breaker as an electric shock protector without connecting the equipment to the earth. Connect the
equipment to the earth securely.
* Wire the earth terminal independently. (Do not connect two or more cables to one terminal.)
* Use the cable sizes on page 14 under the following conditions.
 Surrounding air temperature: 40°C maximum
If conditions are different from above, select appropriate wire according to EN60204 Appendix C TABLE 5.
* Use a tinned (plating should not include zinc) crimping terminal to connect the earth (ground) cable. When tightening the screw, be
careful not to damage the threads.
For use as a product compliant with the Low Voltage Directive, use PVC cable whose size is indicated on page 14.
* Use the moulded case circuit breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or IEC Standard.
* When using an earth leakage current breaker, use a residual current operated protective device (RCD) of type B (breaker which can
detect both AC and DC). If not, provide double or reinforced insulation between the inverter and other equipment, or put a transformer
between the main power supply and inverter.
* Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II (usable regardless of the earth (ground) condition of the power supply),
overvoltage category III (usable with the earthed-neutral system power supply, 400V class only) and pollution degree 2 or lower
specified in IEC60664.
 To use the inverter of 37K or higher (IP00) under the conditions of pollution degree 2, install it in the enclosure of IP 2X or higher.
 To use the inverter under the conditions of pollution degree 3, install it in the enclosure of IP54 or higher.
 To use the inverter of 30K or lower (IP20) outside of an enclosure in the environment of pollution degree 2, fix a fan cover with fan
cover fixing screws enclosed.
Fan cover
fixing screw
Fan cover
fixing screws
Fan cover
fixing screw
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan
Fan
FR-F720P-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740P-3.7K, 5.5K
FR-F720P-7.5K to 15K
FR-F740P-7.5K to 18.5K
Fan
FR-F720P-18.5K to 30K
FR-F740P-22K, 30K
* On the input and output of the inverter, use cables of the type and size set forth in EN60204 Appendix C.
* The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2) should be 30VDC, 0.3A. (Relay output has basic
isolation from the inverter internal circuit.)
* Control circuit terminals on page 9 are safely isolated from the main circuit.
* Environment
Surrounding air
temperature
Ambient humidity
Maximum altitude
During Operation
In Storage
During Transportation
-10°C to +50°C
-20°C to +65°C
-20°C to +65°C
90% RH or less
1000m
90% RH or less
1000m
90% RH or less
10000m
* This inverter does not conform with the EU Directives when used with an IPM motor.
170
Appendix 3 Instructions for UL and cUL compliance
(Standard to comply with: UL 508C, CSA C22.2 No.14)
(1) General Precaution
CAUTION - Risk of Electric Shock The bus capacitor discharge time is 10 minutes. Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for more than 10 minutes,
and check for residual voltage between terminal P/+ and N/- with a meter etc., to avoid a hazard of electrical shock.
ATTENTION - Risque de choc électrique La durée de décharge du condensateur de bus est de 10 minutes. Avant de commencer le câblage ou l’inspection, mettez l’appareil
hors tension et attendez plus de 10 minutes.
(2) Environment
Before installation, check that the environment meets following specifications.
Enclosure
Surrounding air
temperature *1
Constant torque: -10°C to + 50°C Maximum (non-freezing)
Measurement
position
Inverter
5cm
Measurement
position
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature
Ambience
Altitude, vibration
5cm
5cm
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to + 65°C
Indoors (No corrosive and flammable gases, oil mist, dust and dirt.)
Below 1000m, 5.9m/s2 or less *2at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
*1 Surrounding Air Temperature is a temperature measured at a measurement position in an enclosure.
Ambient Temperature is a temperature outside an enclosure.
*2 2.9m/s2 or less for the 185K or more
(3) Installation
The below types of inverter have been approved as products for use in enclosure and approval tests were conducted under the
following conditions. Design the enclosure so that the surrounding air temperature, humidity and ambience of the inverter will satisfy
the above specifications.
Branch Circuit Protection
For installation in the United States, Class RK5, Class J, Class CC, Class L, Class T or any faster acting fuses or UL
489 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) must be provided, in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any
applicable local codes.
For installation in Canada, Class RK5, Class J, Class CC, Class L, Class T or any faster acting fuses or UL 489 Molded
Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) must be provided, in accordance with the Canada Electrical Code and any applicable
provincial codes.
For the FR-F740P-75K to 560K, Class RK5, Class J, Class CC, Class L or Class T fuses or UL 489 Molded Case
Circuit Breaker (MCCB) must be provided.
FR-F720P-K
Rated fuse voltage(V)
Without power factor
Fuse
improving reactor
maximum
allowable
With power factor
rating (A)*
improving reactor
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Maximum allowable rating (A)*
FR-F720P-K
Rated fuse voltage(V)
Without power factor
Fuse
improving reactor
maximum
allowable
With power factor
rating (A)*
improving reactor
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Maximum allowable rating (A)*
FR-F740P-K
Rated fuse voltage(V)
Without power factor
Fuse
improving reactor
maximum
allowable
With power factor
rating (A)*
improving reactor
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Maximum allowable rating (A)*
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
240V or more
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
15
20
30
40
60
80
150
175
200
225
300
350
400
500
15
20
20
30
50
70
125
150
200
200
250
300
350
400
15
15
20
35
50
70
100
125
175
200
250
350
400
500
75
90
110
240V or more



500
600
700
700
800
1000
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
6
10
15
20
30
40
70
6
10
10
15
25
35
15
15
15
15
25
40
11
15
480V or more
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
80
90
110
150
175
200
250
60
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
50
70
80
100
125
175
200
250
171
FR-F740P-K
75
Rated fuse voltage(V)
Without power factor
Fuse
improving reactor
maximum
allowable
With power factor
rating (A)*
improving reactor
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Maximum allowable rating (A)*
90
110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
500V or more















250
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1350
1500
1800
350
450
500
650
800
800
1000
1200
1200
1200
1600
1600
2000
2000
2500
* Maximum allowable rating by US National Electrical Code.
Exact size must be chosen for each installation.
(4) Wiring of the power supply and motor
For wiring the input (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and output (U, V, W) terminals of the inverter, use the UL Listed copper, stranded
wires (rated at 75°C) and round crimping terminals. Crimp the crimping terminals with the crimping tool recommended
by the terminal maker.
(5) Short circuit ratings
 200V class
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 100kA rms Symmetrical Amperes, 264V Maximum.
 400V class
55K or lower
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 100kA rms Symmetrical Amperes, 528V Maximum.
75K or higher
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 100kA rms Symmetrical Amperes, 550V Maximum.
(6) Motor overload protection
Operation time (min)
3
3
Characteristic when
electronic thermal relay
function for motor
protection is turned OFF
(When Pr. 9 setting is 0(A))
240
Operation time (s)
(s) unit display in this range
(min) unit display in
this range
When using the electronic thermal relay function as motor overload protection, set the rated motor current to Pr. 9
Electronic thermal O/L relay.
Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic
This function detects the overload (overheat) of the
Pr. 9 = 50% setting of
Pr. 9 = 100% setting
motor, stops the operation of the inverter's output
inverter rating*1.2
of inverter rating*1.2
transistor, and stops the output. (The operation
characteristic is shown on the left)
70
30Hz or more*
30Hz
20Hz
or more*
 When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
Operation range
Range on the right of
10Hz
20Hz
1) Set "1" in Pr. 71. (This provides a 100% continuous torque
60
characteristic
curve
10Hz
6Hz
Non-operation range
characteristic in the low-speed range.)
6Hz
Range
on
the
left
of
0.5Hz
characteristic curve
50 0.5Hz
2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.
180
*1
120
Electronic thermal relay
function for transistor
protection
60
52.5%
105%
100 120
50
150
Inverter output current (%)
(% to the rated output current)
*2
*3
When 50% of the rated inverter output current (current value) is set
in Pr. 9
The % value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated output current.
It is not the percentage to the rated motor current.
When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies
to operation at 6Hz or higher.
CAUTION
 The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal
input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
 When using multiple motors with one inverter, or using a multi-pole motor or a specialized motor, provide an external thermal
relay (OCR) between the inverter and motor. And for the setting of the thermal relay, add the line-to line leakage current to the
current value on the motor rating plate. For low-speed operation where the cooling capability of the motor reduces, it is
recommended to use a thermal protector or thermistor-incorporated motor.
 When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
 Motor over temperature sensing is not provided by the drive.
The use of FR-F700P with an IPM motor is not certified by the UL nor cUL.
172
MEMO
173
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date
*
Revision
Manual Number
Sep. 2010
May 2011
IB(NA)-0600411ENG-A
IB(NA)-0600411ENG-B
First edition
Feb. 2015
IB(NA)-0600411ENG-C
Addition
 MM-EFS 200V class compatibility
 Overspeed detection (E.OS) function
 Setting values "10 and 11" for Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall
prevention operation
 MM-THE4 75kW to 160kW
 Pr.552 Frequency jump range
Modification
 Rated current of MM-EFS151M(4) to MM-EFS371M(4)
Addition
 MM-EFS71M4 to 55K1M4
 Setting value "210" for Pr. 71 Applied motor
 Setting values "12 and 112" for Pr. 998 IPM parameter initialization
 Setting value "12" for IPM IPM parameter initialization
 Compliance with the Radio Waves Act (South Korea)
For Maximum Safety
• Mitsubishi inverters are not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that
can affect or endanger human life.
• When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in
passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating
applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly advised to
install safety devices to prevent serious accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product
are likely to cause a serious accident.
• Please do not use this product for loads other than three-phase induction motors.
174
IB(NA)-0600411ENG-C
FR-F700P
INVERTER
FR-F700P
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
FR-F720P-0.75K to 110K
FR-F740P-0.75K to 560K
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.
This Instruction Manual (Basic) is intended for users who "just want to run the inverter".
INVERTER
1
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................1
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING ......................................................................3
3
DRIVING THE IPM MOTOR <IPM> .............................................................40
4
DRIVING THE MOTOR ................................................................................45
5
ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................70
6
TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................................................115
7
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION......................140
8
SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................149
700P
1
2
3
4
5
For the customers intending to use IPM motors ......... 40
This inverter is set for a general-purpose motor in the initial settings.
For use with an IPM motor, refer to page 40.
IB(NA)-0600411ENG-C(1502)MEE Printed in Japan
MODEL
FR-F700P
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
MODEL
CODE
1A2-P39
Specifications subject to change without notice.
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
C
6
To obtain the Instruction Manual (Applied)
If you are going to utilize functions and performance, refer to the Instruction
Manual (Applied) [IB-0600412ENG].
The Instruction Manual (Applied) is separately available from where you
purchased the inverter or your Mitsubishi sales representative.
The PDF version of this manual is also available for download at "Mitsubishi
Electric FA site," the Mitsubishi Electric FA network service on the world wide
web (URL: http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/fa/)
7
8